Home

ZyXEL Communications Webcam zyxel User's Manual

Contents

1. C gt netstat Active Connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP COMPUTERA 1056 localhost 5091 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 1091 localhost 27015 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 1120 localhost 40000 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3243 localhost 3244 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3244 localhost 3243 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3246 localhost 3247 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3247 localhost 3246 ESTABLISHED TEP COMPUTERA 5091 localhost 1056 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 5152 localhost 3245 CLOSE_WAT TCP COMPUTERA 27015 localhost 1091 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 1120 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3229 1232 05 05 201 http CLOSE_WATI TCP COMPUTERA 3234 W216 2921055 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3237 PED Gach e292 1 155 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3240 172 16 1 29 1155 ESTABLISHED Ci e P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Use the a parameter to display all possible connections to your device not just the ones that are currently in use C gt netstat a Active Connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP COMPUTERA http COMPUTERA 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA http 172 16 x x 4036
2. op Atl Z ARRET THE ik ERAN TEARRE EAE o WF WWD TEMG gt a ZOE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CES 003 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 357 Appendix H Legal Information Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications Go to http www zyxel com Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or compon
3. NOST ERS OED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS No atos s PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the
4. The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 72 TR 064 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable TR064 Select the check box to activate management via TR 064 on the LAN Enable Some TR 064 commands require authentication before it can be Authenticator executed Select this to have the P 870HN 51D authenticate the user before running the command Deselect this to disable authentication and have the P 870HN 51D run all commands Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 16 Remote Management 16 4 The Service Control Screen Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt Service Control to open the following screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which P 870HN 51D interface Figure 98 Service Control Service Control 2 3 4 5 Service Control Control Service Control Disable Enable a services Lan 1 FTP 4 Y Enable Y Enable R R HTTP a Enable Enable SSH al al Enable Enable TELNET a a Enable Enable TFTP ka a Enable Enable Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 Access Control Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Control Select Enable to turn on service control Otherwise select Disable This is the index number of the entry Services This is the servic
5. P 870HN 51D User s Guide 207 Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 870HN 51D User s Guide 18 1 18 1 1 Parental Control Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the P 870HN 51D performs parental control on a specific user What You Can Do in this Chapter e The Time Restriction screen lets you give different time restrictions to each user of your network Section 18 2 on page 209 e The URL Filter screen lets you restrict home network users from viewing inappropriate websites Section 18 3 on page 211 18 2 The Time Restriction Screen Use this screen to view the schedules and enable parental control on a specific user during certain periods Click Advanced Setup gt Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 116 Parental Control gt Time restriction Time Restriction Access Time Restriction A maximum 16 entries can be configured 1 v Bob 00 a0 c5 01 23 45 x x x x x 08 00 17 30 E4 mi Ada Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 18 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 77 Parental Control gt Time Restriction LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the schedule Active Select the check box to enable the schedule username This shows the nam
6. DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the P 870HN 51D as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the P 870HN 51D provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup IP Pool Setup The P 870HN 51D is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers LAN TCP IP The P 870HN 51D has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address whe
7. Security Settings Settings Scripting B Active scripting Grom 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable Enable Prompt E Scripting of Java applets O Disable Enable Prompt Llenar Auikhanticestian Figure 191 Security Settings Java Scripting m Reset custom settings Reset to Medium x Reset cme Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 192 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Disable Enable E Font download Disable Enable p Prompt 5 Microsoft YM 5 Java permissions custom Qora Jay High safety O Low safety m Reset custom settings j Reset to Medium x Reset ces JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 193 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connection
8. 2 Click Security gt MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen Select Active Enter the MAC address you found in the Client List screen Click Apply MAC Filter MAC Restrict Mode C Disabled Allow Deny SS 1 00 10 C4 84 E0 4B Ww Back Add P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends However Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the P 870HN 51D 2 4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding Thomas recently received an Xbox 360 as his birthday gift His friends invited him to play online games with them on Xbox LIVE In order to communicate and play with other gamers on Xbox LIVE Thomas needs to configure the port settings on his P 870HN 51D Xbox 360 requires the following ports to be available in order to operate Xbox LIVE correctly TCP 53 80 3074 UDP 53 88 3074 Thomas can configure the port settings for Xbox 360 2 4 1 Port Forwarding Configure the ports for Xbox 360 by doing the following 1 Click Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen Select User define from the Service Name field Port Forwarding Trigger Port DMZ Host ALG Port Forwarding Service Name WAN Interface Server IP Address External port Internal port Protocol AWAY z1 poe _0_0_1_1ptm01 v fi 92 1681 Start 80 End e0 Start 80 En
9. DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 M z Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now J 6 Click Apply Now and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the I nfo tab Figure 165 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility 8086 info Netstat Network Utility AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan interface for information Network Interface en0 E Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Link Speed 100 Mb Link Status Active Vendor Marvell Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Sent Packets 20607 Send Errors 0 Recv Packets 22626 Recv Errors 0 Collisions 0 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 but can also apply to 10 6 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 166 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software SSS System Preferences Die T gt Recent Items b Force Quit CES Sleep Restart Shut Down 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Figure 167 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferenc
10. Start This is the first port number that identifies a service End This is the last port number that identifies a service Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service Open Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The P 870HN 51D forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start This is the first port number that identifies a service End This is the last port number that identifies a service Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below No This is the rule index number read only Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this virtual server WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Trigger Start Port This is the first trigger port number that identifies a service Trigger End Port This is the last trigger port number that identifies a service Trigger Proto This is the trigger transport layer protocol 1 means TCP 2 means UDP and 3 means TCP UDP Open Start This is the first open port number that id
11. Table 60 QoS General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance WAN Managed Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interface that you Upstream want to allocate using QoS Bandwidth The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed The P 870HN 51D uses up to 95 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port s actual transmission speed You can also set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed This will cause the P 870HN 51D to not use some of the interface s available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the P 870HN 51D automatically sets this number to be 95 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed LAN WLAN Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN and WLAN Managed interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS Downstream Bandwidth This value depends on what the network adapter supports If the network adapter supports at least 100 Mbps the effective value for the field is any value between 1 Kbps to 100 Mbps The default value is 100 Mbps P 870H
12. IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11n Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 94 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ITU T G 993 2 ITU standard that defines VDSL2 VDSL2 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management TR 064 DSL Forum LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration P 870HN 51D User s Guide 251 Chapter 25 Product Specifications 252 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Network Troubleshooting Overview The three most basic utilities for troubleshooting network connection issues are ipconfig ping and tracert This appendix gives a quick overview of them as well as some common usage examples Moreover three slightly more advanced utilities are also discussed arp route and netstat Note All command examples here use the Microsoft Windows operating system version of the commands Before Getting Started Before using the commands described in this section ensure that you have the TCP IP networking component installed and properly configured for your network adapter Click Start gt Contro
13. IP Address This is the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the P 870HN 51D Remove Select this check box and click the Remove button to delete this entry from the P 870HN 51D Add Click this button to create a new entry Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 16 Remote Management 16 5 1 Adding an IP Address Click the Add button in the IP Address screen to open the following screen Figure 100 IP Address Add IPAddress Access Control IP Address Enter the IP address of the management station permitted to access the local management services and click Apply Save IP Address Apply Save Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 75 IP Address Add LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the P 870HN 51D Apply Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving P 870HN 51D User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP 17 1 Overview Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other dev
14. Interface Group Interface Group Group WAN L Name Lintertace LAN interfaces criteria remove LANL LAN2 LANS LAN4 1 Default ptmo_1 q Note 1 Interface Grouping supports multiple ports to WAN interfaces and bridging groups Each group will perform as an independent network 2 When creating a new group you can select a LAN port manually or use criteria to group a LAN port automatically 3 If a criterion is configured for a specific client device please renew or reboot the client device attached to the modem to allow it to obtain an appropriate IP address 4 If you group a LAN port which your PC is attached to please re attach to other ports belonging to the Default group and configure LAN information for a new group The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 81 Interface Grouping LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the entry Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the goup Remove Click the Remove icon to delete the group Add Click this button to create a new group P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 19 Interface Group 19 2 1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add button in the Interface Group screen to open the following scre
15. Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile Active Select the check box to activate an SSID profile SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the P 870HN 51D s BSSs The SSID Service Set IDentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 112 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 5 1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 52 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP Edit Common Setup I Active Network Name SSID ZyKEL2 7 Hide Network Name SSID BSSID Security Mode No Security z MAC Filter Edit Back Apply Reset See Section 7 4 on page 102 for more details about the fields in this screen 7 6 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configur
16. A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission key 1 ji234567890123 C Key 2 fizsase7e90128 CS C Key 3 fi234567890123 C key 4 ji234567890123 MAC Filter Edit Apply Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 26 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Choose WEP from the drop down list box Mode 106 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 26 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy provides data encryption to prevent Encryption unauthorized wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the wireless network Select 64 bit or 128 bit to enable data encryption Key 1 to Key The WEP key is used to secure your data from eavesdropping by 4 unauthorized wireless users Both the P 870HN 51D and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission Only one key can be activated at any one time Select a default key to use for data encryption If you chose 64 bit in the WEP Encryption field then enter any 5 characters ASCII string or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F preceded by Ox for each key If
17. Figure 134 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix B on page 269 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address P 870HN 51D User s Guide 231 Chapter 22 Tools If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Tools gt Configuration to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 135 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the P 870HN 51D to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 136 Reset Warning Message Microsoft Internet Explorer QD Are you sure you want to reset to factory default settings You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your P 870HN 51D Refer to Section 1 6 on page 25 for more information on the RESET button 22 4 The Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the P 870HN 51D without turning the power off 232 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the P 870HN 51D reboot This does not affect the P 870HN 51D s configuration F
18. See Appendix C on page 299 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 3 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your P 870HN 51D hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type https 192 168 1 1 as the URL P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 A password screen displays Enter the default admin user name admin and default admin password 1234 The password displays in non readable characters If you have changed the password enter your password and click OK Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field Figure 18 Password Screen Connect to 192 168 1 1 DSL Router User name Password is admin E Cl Remember my password 3 2 Web Configurator Main Screen Figure 19 Main Screen ZyXEL 1 lt Status LAN Wireless LAN NAT Firewall Certificates Static Route Policy Forwarding Dynamic DNS Remote MGMT UPnP Parental Control Interface Group gt Status Device Information User Name Model Number MAC Address Firmware Version DSL Firmware Version WAN 1 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information Channel WPS Status AP 1 Information ESSID Status Security admin P 870HN 51d 00 19 cb 00 00 01 1 01 C
19. gt cea RET WLAN Unconfigured 150M Security Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK More Status WAN Service Statistics WDSL Statistics Route Info LAN Statistics WLAN Station List Client List P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Each field is described in the following table Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the P 870HN 51D to update this screen Apply Click this to update this screen immediately Device Information User Name __ This field displays the P 870HN 51D system name It is used for identification Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Model This is the model name of your device Number MAC This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to Address your P 870HN 51D Firmware This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device Version It also shows the date the firmware version was created Click this to go to the screen where you can change it DSL This field displays the current version of the device s DSL modem code Firmware Version WAN Information Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the P 870HN 51D in the WAN IP Subnet This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Mask LAN Information IP Address This field displays the current IP address of
20. s Guide Logs 21 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the P 870HN 51D s logs The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the P 870HN 51D log and then display the logs or have the P 870HN 51D send them to a syslog server 21 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The View Log screen lets you see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen Section 21 2 on page 223 e The Log Settings screen lets you configure to where the P 870HN 51D is to send logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the P 870HN 51D is to record Section 21 3 on page 224 21 2 The View Log Screen Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 21 3 on page 224 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 223 Chapter 21 Logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Figure 126 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log iew Logs Display Medium v 2 Jan 1 00 53 02 Medium System Event kernel IPSEC SPU SUCCEEDED 3 Jan 1 00 53 02 Medium Ethernet kernel ethi Link UP 100 mbps full duplex j Date Time Severity system essage 1 Jan100 53 02 High System Event BCM96345 started BusyBox v1 00 2009 07 06 04 52 0000 The following table describes the
21. 1 7 Buffer Drop Tail OT Management Drop Tail DT lag Rate Limit kbps Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 QoS Queue Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 3 of this queue The smaller the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 73 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 62 QoS Queue Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Weight Select the weight from 1 to 8 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the P 870HN 51D divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Buffer This field displays Drop Tail DT Drop Tail DT is a simple queue Management management algorithm that allows the P 870HN 51D buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full Once the buffer is full new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again packets are transmitted out of it Rate Limit Specify the maximum tra
22. Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 202 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP P 870HN 51D User s Guide 321 Appendix E Wireless LANs Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 203 Basic Service Set Sauannasn m S es d A A H ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with th
23. An extension number called the TCP port or UDP port identifies these protocols such as HTTP Web FTP File Transfer Protocol POP3 E mail etc For example Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80 When computers communicate on the Internet they are using the client server model where the server listens on a specific TCP UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network For example a Web server typically listens on port 80 Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port such as Web on port 80 other ports are also active If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful a hacker P 870HN 51D User s Guide could attack it over an unprotected port Chapter 9 Firewall Some of the most common IP ports are Table 44 Common IP Ports 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Default Filtering Policies Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN to the LAN If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN you will need to create custom rules to allow it Note If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network Make sure you test
24. Chapter 2 Tutorials Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through 2 7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour You also upload data files such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10 000 kbps For this example you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5 000 kbps You can do the following e Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 7 to e mail traffic from the LAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the IP address 192 168 1 23 for example and or MAC address AA FF AA FF AA FF for example of your computer and map it to queue 7 Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the P 870HN 51D Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping tabl
25. DUID Type Select DUID LLT DUID Based on Link layer Address Plus Time to enter the hardware type a time value and the MAC address of the device Select DUID EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered enterprise number Select DUID LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the device s hardware type and hardware address MAC address in the following fields Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field Hardware Enter the 16 bit hardware type of the device from which the traffic type comes For example Ethernet is 1 and Experimental Ethernet is 2 Time Enter the time in seconds since midnight UTC January 1 2000 the DUID is generated Link layer Enter the MAC address of the device address Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA number Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier DUID of the device DHCP Option 125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA number Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Manufacturer Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique Identifier It is usually OUI the first three bytes of the MAC address Product Class Enter the product clas
26. Enter the destination subnet mask Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewall Table 46 Firewall gt Incoming Add continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Select Select All to apply the rule to all interfaces on the P 870HN 51D or select the specific WAN interface s to which this rule applies Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewall P 870HN 51D User s Guide 10 1 10 1 1 Certificate Overview The P 870HN 51D can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the P 870HN 51D s CA signed certificates Section 10 4 on page 154 e The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the P 870HN 51D Section 10 4 on page 154 10 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Certification Authority A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees
27. Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST Figure 178 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Seachs eR Applications gt Administrator Settings Install Software ea System Information A Home Folder A 2 My Documents ry Network Folders Prat System Folders 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available a Eavorites Applications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Figure 179 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Run as root KDE su Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbin yast2 P
28. RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The P 870HN 51D supports both IGMP version 1 I GMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the P 870HN 51D queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the P 870HN 51D periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the P 870HN 51D LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The P 870HN 51D supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the P 870HN 51D itself as the gateway for each LAN network When you use IP alias
29. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if you enable the SIP ALG Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP VoIP ALG in the P 870HN 51D To access this screen click NAT gt ALG Figure 68 NAT gt ALG ALG Enable SIP ALG Apply Each field is described in the following table Table 42 NAT gt ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION Active SIP ALG Select this check box to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P 870HN 51D SIP is a signaling protocol used in VolP Voice over IP the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings 8 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 870HN 51D features described in this chapter P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT Table 43 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 11
30. gt System Preferences Figure 160 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon Figure 161 Mac OS X 10 4 System Preferences ee System Preferences 4 gt Show All fal j Personal TEMA Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware hy a a Q gt E m 9 Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Q a Internet amp Ne Mac QuickTime Sharing System D F5 u Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure Figure 162 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences 0900 Network 4 Showall Q Location Automatic iz Show Network Status iz Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the connection AirPort Configure Q sc
31. increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications P 870HN 51D User s Guide 335 Appendix E Wireless LANs e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas
32. or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click this button to return to the previous screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate 10 4 2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen The P 870HN 51D trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates Figure 80 Trusted CA Import Certificate Import CA Certificate Certificate Enter certificate name and paste certificate content Maximun content length is up to 4096 bytes PS If the CA certificate is for WAN Management Protocol TR 069 usage please enter certificate name as acscert PS If the CA certificate is for SIP usage please enter certificate name as sipcacert Certificate Name Back Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 54 Trusted CA Import Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 870HN 51D Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide 157 C
33. twpc11 01 MAC Address 00 21 85 0c 44 4b IP Address 192 168 1 33 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Status gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name This indicates the computer host name MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 This indicates the MAC address of the client computer IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens P 870HN 51D User s Guide WAN Setup 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the P 870HN 51D s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your P 870HN 51D for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 27 LAN and WAN WAN ia 7 INTERNEJ See Section 5 6 on page 84 for advanced technical information on WAN 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Layer 2 Interface screen lets you view remove or add a layer 2 WAN interface Section 5 4 on page 71 The Internet Connection scr
34. you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN s logical networks subnets Note Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A and B Figure 43 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Ethernet Interface es B 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network including the following e Turning the wireless connection on or off e Configuring a name wireless channel and security for the network e Using WiFi Protected Setup WPS to configure your wireless network e Using a MAC Media Access Control address filter to restrict access to the wireless network See Chapter 2 on page 27 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless connection in an example scenario See Section 7 9 on page 117 for advanced technical information on wireless networks 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This chapter describes the P 870HN 51D s Network gt Wireless LAN screens Use these screens to set up your P 870HN 51D s wireless connection e The General screen lets you turn the wireless connection on or off set up wireless security and make other basic configuration changes Section 7 4 on page 102 You can also configure the MAC
35. 11 Mode field Click Apply Figure 4 AP Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup General More AP WPS WPS Station BE TCE EA Wireless Advanced Setup 802 11 Mode 802 11biqin Mixed 7 RTS CTS Threshold par Fragmentation Threshold pss Number of Wireless Stations Allowed he Output Power 100 z 802 11 Protection auto Preamble tong z 6 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Figure 5 AP Status ZyXEL gt Status SJ Refresh Interval None Apply Status User Name admin System Uptime 0 days 0 hours 39 minutes WAN Model Number P 870HN 51d Bona 01 Jan 2000 00 39 26 MAC Address 00 19 cb 00 00 01 See System Mode Routing Bridging Firmware Version 1 01 CBB 0 b3 7 s Wireless LAN DSL Firmware A CED CPU Usage ae 1 00 Version pX Memory Usage SESU WAN 1 Information Mode PTM IPoE IP Address 0 0 0 0 I Interface Status IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Renew E System LAN Information Pietertace status ate IP Address 192 168 1 1 z DSL Link Down kbps kbps IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Tools DHCP SEINO LANI Up 100M Full Diagnostic WLAN Information LAN2 NoLink N A Channel 11 auto ink NA WPS Status Unconfiqured BANS seb g AP 1 Information LAN4 NoLink N A ESSID SSID Example3 Status Active Securit
36. 51D is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the P 870HN 51D 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the P 870HN 51D and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the P 870HN 51D off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 23 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the P 870HN 51D off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 24 2 P 870HN 51D Access and Login forgot the IP address for the P 870HN 51D 1 The default IP address is https 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the P 870HN 51D by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the P 870HN 51D it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 6 on page 2
37. 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1
38. Analysis VDSL Profile This shows the name of the VDSL profile which is applied to the VDSL port to which the P 870HN 51D is connected Traffic Type This indicates whether the PTM interface is active PTM Mode or inactive Inactive 62 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 Status gt VDSL Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VDSL Port Details These are the maximum Upstream and Downstream transfer rates for the ports that belong to this profile Upstream traffic refers to traffic from the P 870HN 51D to the Central Organization Equipment COE Downstream traffic refers to traffic from the COE to the P 870HN 51D Line Rate This indicates the maximum upstream downstream net data rate currently attainable on this line Actual Net Line Rate This indicates the actual upstream downstream data transmission rate Trellis Coding Trellis coding is a modulation scheme which allows highly efficient transmission of information over band limited channels such as telephone lines N A means Trellis coding is disabled or not used on the P 870HN 51D SNR Margin This indicates the upstream downstream SNR margin Actual Delay This indicates the actual upstream downstream transmission delay in milliseconds Transmit This indicates the upstream downstream transmission power of the line Power Receive Power This indicates the upstream downstrea
39. Button Or input station s PIN number Start Q Note 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility 3 This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode is configured The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the P 870HN 51D to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button Or input Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection station s PIN with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your number wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide 115 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 8 The Advanced Setup Screen To configure advanced wireless settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup The screen appears as s
40. Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the P 870HN 51D Add Click this button to create a new rule Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 870HN 51D 19 2 2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen Figure 123 Interface Grouping Criteria Criterion Source MAC Address DHCP option 60 DHCP option 61 IAID DUID type Hardware type Time Link layer address C DHCP option 125 Enterprise Number Manufacturer OUI Product Class Model Name Serial Number m DUID LLT Back Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 83 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL DESCRIPTION Source MAC Enter the source MAC address of the packet Address DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier IAID of the device for example the WAN connection index number P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 19 Interface Group Table 83 Interface Grouping Criteria continued LABEL DESCRIPTION
41. Connection Enabled i Network Troubleshooter eee E A Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places Control Panel My Network Places E3 My Documents 4 My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 5 Right click on the icon for your P 870HN 51D and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Figure 114 Network Connections My Network Places T My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back gt S P Search E Folders Ez Address g My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks Py XEL Sharing Gateway af Add a network place view network connections Invoke Set up a home or small office network View workgroup computers Create Shortcut Rename Properties Other Places 6 Right click on the icon for your P 870HN 51D and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the P 870HN 51D Figure 115 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway General mj ZUXEL Internet Sharing Gatewar Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 4 192 168 1 1
42. Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components EE ee ao amen enon chi mon 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details Figure 105 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components O Management and Monitoring Tools M lt Networking Services 0 3 MB C 4 Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB _Detais Space available on disk 260 9 MB Details P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 5 Inthe Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 106 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services O RIP Listener 0 0 MB O A Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB 1 amp Universal Plug and Play Descrip
43. DESCRIPTION Active Click the check box to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel or use Auto to have the P 870HN 51D automatically determine a channel to use If you are having problems with wireless interference changing the channel may help Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible The channel number which the P 870HN 51D is currently using then displays next to this field P 870HN 51D User s Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Select whether the P 870HN 51D uses a wireless channel width of 2OMHz or 40MHz A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps 40MHz channel bonding or dual channel bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding This field is available only when you set the 802 11 Mode to 802 11n Only or 802 11b g
44. DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new policy No This field displays the index number of the policy Active Select the check box to enable the policy Name This is the name of the policy Regulated This shows to which classes the policy applies Classes Meter Type This shows the method that the P 870HN 51D uses for determining which packets to pass drop or mark DSCP whether it s Simple Token Bucket Single Rate Three Color Meter or Two Rate Three Color Meter Refer to Section 14 8 2 on page 186 for information on these meter types Parameter Committed Rate This shows the maximum committed rate for the specified class es Committed Burst Size This shows the maximum committed burst size for the specified class es P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 65 QoS gt Policer Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Conforming Action This shows the action that the P 870HN 51D applies to packets that conform to the meter type selected and can be Pass Drop or DSCP mark Non Conforming Action This shows the action that the P 870HN 51D applies to packets that do not conform to the meter type selected and can be Pass Drop or DSCP mark e Pass the packet is allowed to flow to its destination e Drop the packet is discarded e DSCP mark the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed P oramai See Section 14 8 1 on page 185 for information on DSC
45. E E E E E E E T EA 359 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Table of Contents P 870HN 51D User s Guide PART User s Guide Introducing the P 870HN 51D 1 1 Overview The P 870HN 51D is a VDSL2 device that allows super fast secure Internet access It extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring providing easy network access to mobile users You can set up a wireless network with other I EEE 802 11b g n compatible devices A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing The P 870HN 51D supports Quality of Service QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Please refer to the following description of the product name format e H denotes an integrated 4 port hub switch e N denotes IEEE 802 11n wireless functionality There is an embedded mini PCI module for IEEE 802 11b g n wireless LAN connectivity Only use firmware for your P 870HN 51D s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your P 870HN 51D Models ending in 1 for example P 870HN 51D denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service See Chapter 25 on page 247 for a full list of features 1 2 P 870HN 51D for Internet Access Your P 870HN 51D provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to th
46. E H Enabled NAT NAT Type IGMP Multicast Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any PPPoE pppoe_O 01 2 Automatically Assigned Enabled Enabled Symmetric NAT Enabled Disabled Back Apply Save P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection Service Name This is the name of the service Service Category This is the ATM traffic class This field is blank for a PTM or Ethernet WAN conenction IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP manually configured or not configurable Service State This shows whether this service is active or not NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection NAT Type This shows the type of NAT implemented for this connection Firewall This shows whether Firewall is active or not for this connection Quality Of This shows whether QoS is active or not for this connection Service IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this connection Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Save Click this button to save your changes 5 6 Technical Reference The following secti
47. ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 2744 NAS microsoft ds ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 5152 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA 5152 localhost 4067 CLOSE_WAIT TCP COMPUTERA 5354 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TGP COMPUTERA 27015 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 0 IS ING TEP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 1120 ESTABLISHED TEP COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 Is ING TCP COMPUTERA 4177 P72 1 6 ex xce1155 STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4178 V2 1 6 ETT SS STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4180 172 16 x x 1155 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4182 V2 1 62xX48 21025 STABLISHED TCE COMPUTERA 4317 NAS microsoft ds STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4539 NAS microsoft ds IME_WAIT TCP COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x 0 LISTENING TCP COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x 0 LISTENING C gt The following table describes the three entries in the output example above Table 96 netstat a Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION TCP A web server is available on COMPUTERA as an HTTP COMPUTERA http service is in a LISTENING state COMPUTERA 0 LISTENING TCP A computer with an IP address of 172 16 1 29 is accessing COMPUTERA http the web service on the COMPUTERA 172 16 1 29 4036 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA has established a TCP IP NETBIOS COMPUTERA 2744 connection microsoft ds with a NAS device AS microsoft ds ESTABLISHED P 870HN 51D User s Guide A
48. ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 97 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 98 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 2
49. LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a layer 2 Select a PTM interface to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use interface for this the VDSL technology for data transmission service Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 2 Service Type Use this screen to configure how you want the P 870HN 51D to connect to the Internet Figure 32 WAN Configuration Service Type WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet C Bridging Enter Service Description pppoe_0_0_1 MTU 1 1500 1492 M Tag VLAN ID for egress packets Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 Enter 802 10 VLAN ID 1 4094 Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 WAN Configuration Service Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Select WAN Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP service type Choices are PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet and Bridging Enter Service Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated Description one P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 16 WAN Configuration Service Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit Enter the maximum transmission rate in Kbps for traffic sent through the WAN connection Otherwise leave this field blank to disable the rate limit This field is n
50. LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the P 870HN 51D s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol open port the P 870HN 51D forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes P 870HN 51D User s Guide 133 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application For example Figure 64 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Real Audio Server Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the P 870HN 51D to record J ane s computer IP address The P 870HN 51D associates Jane s computer IP address with the open port range of 6970 7170 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 The P 870HN 51D forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The P 870HN 51D times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol Click NAT gt Trigger Port to open the following scree
51. N4 ST OK C US MIITBczCB3 QIBADAONOswCOYDVQOQDEwJ UV ZELMAKGALUECHMNCTKEXxCZAJBQGNVBAgT AKSLMQs uCOYDVQOGE wIVUZCBnzaNBgkqhkiG9SwOBAQEF AAOBJQAUgGYkKCgGYEAycOz FNRRKCxGpjfOYkicRO28ui6xBgSOY2o0hIGJi6AxXbnNED4FROKF yIR46PCut73 6Me GRrfHOAFD3 z49NRTUKSxBkZR1IW cf67rideChLfov4glkesdsIK6TUSSsOFIpLVC khe PB6kSNOCJ y1 53b6e YUUbSNLUMMp40e TVheC AWE ALA AANAOGCS GS Ib3DQEB BAUAM4GBAEXF ec 1pCf juViNISQ7ozxtkCyNEbODtU8 41gDYs7rORQqQtg nzLKO STAHbtLoKXCS 1INb1OB3 elJkhAoRHt wl zBCST3I80q1O1luljo7calvSrBoHRdItpl ugUmiTeF9uyaAV4tLulMLG15E zmio4VKaH j 6RFOFV9OWES 6V5g1sB Signing END CERTIFICATE REQUEST Request Back Load Signed Certificate 10 3 2 Import Certificate Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then I mport Certificate to open the I mport Local Certificate screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import it Figure 75 Import Local Certificate Import Local Certificate Enter certificate name paste certificate content and private key Maximun content length is up to 4096 bytes PS If the Local certificate is for SIP usage please enter certificate name as sipcert Certificate Name Certificate Private Key Back Apply The following table describes the labels in t
52. P 870HN 51D is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 100 Mbps Off The P 870HN 51D does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN WLAN Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in EEE WPS 802 11b g n mode Blinking The P 870HN 51D is communicating with other wireless clients at 2 H2 s Orange Blinking The P 870HN 51D is setting up a WPS connection Off The wireless network is not activated DSL Green On The VDSL line is up Blinking The P 870HN 51D is initializing the VDSL line Off The DSL line is down INTERNET Green On The P 870HN 51D has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The P 870HN 51D is sending or receiving IP traffic Red On The P 870HN 51D attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed Off The P 870HN 51D does not have an IP connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 870HN 51D 1 6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you
53. PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID P 870HN 51D User s Guide 333 Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 207 WPA 2 PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary INTERNEJ Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 111 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD KEY ENCRYPTIO ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT N METHOD MANUAL KEY i PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared
54. See Chapter 4 on page 55 for more information about the Status screen 3 2 3 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated P 870HN 51D User s Guide st Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 52 P 870HN 51D User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference Status Screens 4 1 Overview Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device system resources and interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and statistics from traffic 4 2 Status Screen Click Status to open this screen Figure 20 Status Screen Refresh Interval None ied Apply Device Information System Status User Name admin System Uptime 0 days 3 hours 44 minutes Model Number P 870HN 51d Current Date Time 01 Jan 2000 03 46 57 MAC Address 00 19 cb 00 00 01 System Mode Routing Bridging Firmware Version 1 01 CBB 0 b2 CPU Usage a 1 99 DSL Firmware Version A2pv6C030h d22k Memory Usage EE 70 WAN 1 Information Mode PTM IPoE IP Address 0 0 0 0 Interface Status Status IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 LAN Information Interface IP Address te DSL Link Down kbps kbps IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server LANL NoLink N A WLAN Information LANZ NoLink N A Channel 6 y WPS Status Unconfigured BARE Renae Wa AP 1 Information LAN4 Up 100M Full
55. VLAN 87 Introduction 87 number of possible VI Ds priority frame static VLAN ID 87 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 87 W WAN Wide Area Network 69 WAN interface 59 WAN statistics 58 warranty 358 note 358 Web Configurator 47 WEP encryption 108 Wi Fi Protected Access 330 Windows Command Prompt 254 arp 261 command parameters 254 ipconfig 255 netstat 265 ping 257 route 262 tracert 259 wireless client WPA supplicants 332 wireless security 326 wireless station list 61 Wireless tutorial 27 WLAN interference 323 security parameters 334 WLAN button 25 WPA 330 key caching 332 pre authentication 332 user authentication 331 vs WPA PSK 331 wireless client supplicant 332 with RADIUS application example 332 WPA2 330 user authentication 331 vs WPA2 PSK 331 wireless client supplicant 332 with RADIUS application example 332 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 330 WPA2 PSK 330 331 application example 333 WPA PSK 330 331 application example 333 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index WPS status 57 P 870HN 51D User s Guide
56. WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna
57. a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point MEP ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain MD level An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults P 870HN 51D User s Guide 235 Chapter 23 Diagnostic e Loopback test checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response LBR from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message LBM If no response is received there might be a connectivity fault between them e Link trace test provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP this may indicate a fault Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report 23 3 The General Diagnostic Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the screen shown next Ping and traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot network or Internet connections Figure 138 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General General Info TCP IP Address URL or IP Address Ping Traceroute The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 90 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Address Type the I
58. are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Bridge utils 1 2 Busybox 1 0 0 Bftpd 1 0 24 Dnsmasq 2 48 Ebtables 2 0 6 proute2 2 4 7 ptables 1 3 8 MIPS linux kernel 2 6 21 5 NTFS 3G 1 231 Ppp 2 4 1 Samba 3 0 34 Udhcp 0 9 6 and zebra 0 93a under below GPL license P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom
59. arp 261 Auto Configuration Server see ACS 191 backup 230 Basic Service Set See BSS 321 blinking LEDs 24 broadcast 88 BSS 321 C CA 147 329 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 235 certificate details 152 factory default 148 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 147 authentication 147 Index CA creating 149 importing 150 153 public key 147 replacing 148 storage space 148 Certification Authority 147 Certification Authority see CA certifications 355 notices 357 viewing 358 CFI 88 CFM 235 CCMs 235 link trace test 236 loopback test 236 MA 235 MD 235 MEP 235 MIP 235 channel 323 interference 323 channel ID 103 command parameters 254 command syntax 254 configuration 92 95 Connectivity Check Messages see CCMs copyright 355 CoS 184 CoS technologies 170 CPU usage 57 creating certificates 149 CTS Clear to Send 324 D date and time 57 default 232 default LAN IP address 47 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index DHCP 66 92 95 96 189 DHCP client 66 DHCP client list 66 DHCP relay 248 DHCP server 248 diagnostic 236 Differentiated Services see DiffServ 184 DiffServ 184 marking rule 185 digital IDs 147 disclaimer 355 DNS 93 DNS server address assignment 88 Domain Name 139 domain name system see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DS field 185 DS dee differentiated services DSCP 184 DSL interface 70 dynamic DNS 189 Dynamic Host Configur
60. configuration interface Note If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which 5 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes Note Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 6 Onacomputer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful P 870HN 51D User s Guide 123 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 57 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL D C SSID WPA 2 PSK J COMMUNICATION i 7 9 4 3 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the netw
61. contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 101 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 102 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 103 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 104 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Addr
62. cs A E A N E AE AA T I E E EA AAA EA AE A E A E AT 55 a STIS GOET oea ee r a EEA e Ee E E 55 AAT WAN Serica SIAS IES eo cssiesd aaxcderses ic vdaein SN NA AE A ANAA 58 A ee ROE ND aan lalodue Sic aid dacd ae cducekd ams dudgaone eraaenti aituderd vhue pigdeanantaweceiatbes 60 Oe AEAN Saton LEE dcenentin tne cetiard tamer ap pncade sad ectve a a 61 4AA VDSL CHAS UOS oerinoar a a EEEE r ERR 62 AT SIAN eS ionin a aa iaetet ates 66 e O LE aaa A 66 Chapter 5 Le 1 ee pre ee eo Or EY nr E E nee eee eee 69 BN EN INE oaa case bibauadecre liane notuegesemboeseaetesieds 69 BL Whal Vou Gait Doin this Chaple ciccaccncccciccsnciegiocetouuepdaceebnedesctedeateiaaanctmonsSatadmwmecietent 69 5 2 What You Need to KNOW oicloccicsisranccvascuniarerdausuactine sandals codsauioun deanduackiuas dias TAAVON 70 Peed PENE NES nna 71 me The Layer 2 rhea DOEN sonurinn a na AAA 71 54 1 Layer 2 Interlace Configuratio inisissinivnsnoniisndasi aa aaa aaie 72 5 5 The Intemet Connection Sereen acc ccdicccnsscacsciccanadsciscanednciesonned lacacanmencaceenieeacsosstereauroummmweaiecs 73 5 5 1 WAN Gonnection Configuration scsi cruise sactidaamuaxadsinsheiesrasa teataatiin dani ianiss 74 56 Technical Reference gsicsecuicca bseciiecdcccsialogeeh E ORNS 84 Chapter 6 LAN SETUP ae E Eaa a a enn ene en eee 91 NU a a mma ere pass eae tenet st santas 91 12 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Table of Contents 61 What you Can Do imihis CMa Pet scents sesaaioiees
63. e Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network e Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded P 870HN 51D User s Guide 187 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 188 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup 15 1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 15 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Dynamic DNS screen Section 15 3 on page 190 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the P 870HN 51D 15 2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if yo
64. enforced URL Filter Use this screen to prevent users of your netowrk from viewing inappropriate web content Interface Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group Group Maintenance System General Use this screen to configure your device s name domain name management inactivity timeout and password Time Setting Use this screen to change your P 870HN 51D s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to change your P 870HN 51D s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Restart This screen allows you to reboot the P 870HN 51D without turning the power off P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Diagnostic General Use this screen to test the connections to other devices 802 1lag Use this screen to configure CFM Connectivity Fault Management MD maintenance domain and MA maintenance association perform connectivity tests and view test reports 3 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document Right after you log in the Status screen is displayed
65. fields provided Figure 183 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings YaST2 linux h20z Enter the name for lal this computer and the DNS domain that it belongs to Optionally enter the name server list and domain search list Note that the hostname is global it applies to all l Network Settings Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Hostname and Domain Name Hostname Domain Name linux h2oz site _ Change Hostname via DHCP _ Write Hostname to etc hosts interfaces not just this one The domain is especially important if this computer is a mail server If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your host which can be seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect gt to different networks Ss X Change etc resolv conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List Name Server 1 Domain Search 10 0 2 3 Name Server 2 Name Server 3 C Update DNS data via DHCP 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation i Disable Wireless amp 3 Switch to Offline Mode
66. for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by International Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfe
67. handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the
68. in the local memory Syslog Server IP Address Syslog Server UDP Port ea ea Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 87 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable system logging Log Level Select the severity level of the logs that you want the P 870HN 51D to display record and send to the log server The P 870HN 51D displays and records the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected Mode Select Local to record the logs and store them in the local memory of the P 870HN 51D only Select Remote to send logs to the specified log server Select Both to record the logs and store them in the local memory and also send logs to the log server Syslog Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the log server IP Address Syslog Server Enter the UDP port of the log server UDP Port Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs P 870HN 51D User s Guide 22 1 22 1 1 Tools Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your P 870HN 51D Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware manage configuration files and restart your P 870HN 51D Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device s configuration file or upgrade its firmware After you c
69. in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection 10 Open your Internet browser enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER If you are able to access the web site your new profile is successfully configured 11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen select the profile you are using and click Edit Check the details you entered previously Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary P 870HN 51D User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter J osephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent J osephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams Josephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the P 870HN 51D Thomas decides to use the Security gt MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to J osephine s computer Thomas D C TA 1 Click Status gt Client List to open the following screen Look for the MAC address of Thomas computer Josephine Client List Hostname MAC Address IP Address twpc13508 03 00 1 c 04 84 e0 4b 192 168 1 33 00 19 c0 41 70 10 twpc13508 04 192 168 1 34
70. is in progress Figure 128 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Firmware Upgrade need to reconfigure To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may NOTE The update proccess takes about 2 minutes to complete and the DSL Router will reboot Current Firmware Version 1 01 CBB 0 b3 File Path Browse Upload The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Firmware Version This is the present Firmware version and the date created File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen wait two minutes before logging into the P 870HN 51D again Figure 129 Firmware Upload In Progress The P 870HN 51D automatically restarts in this time causing a temp
71. is the number of an individual static route Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Netmask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Remove Click the icon to remove a static route from the P 870HN 51D A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route Add Click this to create a new rule Apply Click this to apply your changes to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Route 11 2 1 Static Route Edit Click the Add button in the Static Route screen Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route Figure 83 Static Route Add Static Route Setup Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Use Interface ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_1 v Use Gateway IP Address Back l Apply l Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Static Route Add LABEL
72. is up ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs since the connection is up SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs since the connection is up UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS since the connection is up LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures since the connection is up LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures since the connection is up P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 5 LAN Statistics Click Status gt LAN Statistics to access this screen Use this screen to view the LAN statistics Figure 25 Status gt LAN Statistics LAN Statistics interface Received O Transmitted LANL 0 0 0 0 55317309 379804 0 0 LANZ 0 0 0 0 55317245 379803 0 0 LANS 0 0 0 0 55317181 379802 0 0 LAN4 61139979 426527 0 0 15226697 55217 0 0 4 2 6 Client List ROS ee Setinterval E stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Status gt LAN Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Received Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drops This indic
73. know was made in 1971 you could use 7Ododchal71vanpoi as your security key Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal 7 3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 7 2 on page 100 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you e What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support IEEE 802 11g for example What is the most appropriate standard to use e What security options do the other wireless devices support WPA PSK for example What is the best one to use e Do the other wireless devices support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more complicated to do e
74. length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the P 870HN 51D uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has P 870HN 51D User s Guide 325 Appendix E Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 108 IEEE 802 119 MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keyi
75. number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs since the last reset P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 Status gt VDSL Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS since the last reset LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures since the last reset LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures since the last reset Latest 15 This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the last 15 minutes time minute time segment FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures since the last 15 minute time segment CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s since the last 15 minute time segment ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs since the last 15 minute time segment SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs since the last 15 minute time segment UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS since the last 15 minute time segment LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures since the last 15 minute time segment LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures since the last 15 minute time segment Previous 15 This indicates VDSL performance information reco
76. obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the P 870HN 51D allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP 17 3 The UPnP Screen Click Advanced gt UPnP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 197 for more information Figure 101 Advanced gt UPnP UPnP Setup Enable Universal Plug and Play UPnP feature qQ Note Enable NAT in WAN service before enabling UPnP Apply Save P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 76 Advanced gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Universal Plug Select this check box to enable UPnP Be aware that anyone and Play UPnP Feature could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the P 870HN 51D s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Apply Save Click t
77. on the console Connection Request Authentication Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS Connection Request User Name Enter the connection request user name When the ACS makes a connection request to the P 870HN 51D this user name is used to authenticate the ACS P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 16 Remote Management Table 71 TR 069 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Enter the connection request password Request i i Password When the ACS makes a connection request to the P 870HN 51D this password is used to authenticate the ACS Connection This shows the connection request URL Request URL i The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the P 870HN 51D Apply Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 3 The TR 064 Screen TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt TRO6G4 to open the following screen Figure 97 TR 064 TROG64 TRO64 IM Enable TRO64 7 Enable Authentication Apply
78. or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Softw
79. order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 60 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR p EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 o AP1 Laa we ENROLLEE o YA 6 cK 4e CLIENT 2 In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 61 WPS Example Network Step 3 p EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 AP1 REGISTRAR J amp CLIENT 2 Ss ENROLLEE CUp Yn ty o ay AP2 7 9 4 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set
80. p2BUL4t2 gmLa3 ZT1WzSmv I BACNQKiPLATYYaDfnH RJ lhs1NF f2nAqLNXICsPqafn6jTtHOvGSHpOvK9du9nL4NC2 AlKbSyf6v T RNIXKISwk2Zt5S JTZzSrak3 6LRCOIDAQABO4HKEMIHHMBOGAIUADGOQWBBTBSubO NkasoftDMiFD hP r iWkzCBsOYDVROJBIGpMIGmgBTBSubOsANkasoftDMiFDfhPr saAwk6GBiqsBhzcB hHDELMAkGALUEBHNCQOO4xEDAOBGNVBAgTBOppYWSnU3 UxDTALBGNVBAcTBFd1leGkx DIAMBGNVBAOTBVpSWEVMMNOuUCGYDVQOLEwNzdzIxEj AQBGNVBAMNTCUxvY2FsaG9z ADEINCAGCS GS Ib3 DOEJARYTc2VsalShLnNibkB6eXhlbCSjboIBADAMBGNVHRME BTADAQH MAOGCSqGS Ib3 DOEBBAUAASGBAJ3 800rfqjGzZaLswiP8s nhmE4g1Daz T q8nxXC 6cNnpexXak0t93 lhrker qNuPkg581726Xm2 zp7k5ufP4gWOFPUTN3m7E RKFSJoIvn rK5s3V xv5NZs7Wze15Idmth2kB8b5 s1VXjcRodClUWQmMMOUNC1NS 6wiznH6Qus3y Certificate g The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 53 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends
81. s a ee ey Bint ae a ADs LODZ Default Gateway 2 2 2 4 GENS P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting ping The ping command line utility allows you to verify the connection and latency between your computer and either the P 870HN 51D or other devices on the network If you cannot reach a target using this command then it may indicate possible network trouble Syntax ping target The target can be an IP address or a host name Parameters ping w timeout target The timeout parameter allows you to input the number of seconds in milliseconds that your computer waits for a reply The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt ping www zyxel com Pinging a1524 g akamai net 203 69 113 18 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 7ms TTL 48 Ping statistics for 203 69 113 18 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 6ms Maximum 7ms Average 6ms The number of bytes here indicates packet size As most data is broken up into smaller packets this makes the ping test fairly representative of a typical network connection The default packet size on Windows is 32 bytes Time is the number of millis
82. sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 9 3 1 SSID Normally the P 870HN 51D acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the P 870HN 51D does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 9 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the P 870HN 51D which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the informa
83. share one MAC address Enable Quality Of Select this option to activate QoS Quality of Service on this interface Service to group and prioritize traffic Traffic is grouped according to the VLAN group The QoS setting applies to all WAN connections over the same PVC Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your P 870HN 51D s WAN settings Click Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection The summary table shows you the configured WAN services connections on the P 870HN 51D To use NAT firewall or IGMP proxy in the P 870HN 51D you need to configure a WAN connection with PPPoE or PoE Note When a layer 2 interface is in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC Mode you can configure up to eight WAN services for each interface Figure 30 Internet Connection Internet Connection Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface interface Descrintion Type Rate Vianeozip vianNuxtd Conntd 1GNP Nat Firewall Modify ptmO_1 ipoe_O0_0 1 1 PTM IPoE N A N A N A 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled g ff Add The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Internet Connection LABEL
84. the P 870HN 51D in the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IP Subnet This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN Mask DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the P 870HN 51D is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The P 870HN 51D is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The P 870HN 51D acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The P 870HN 51D is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it WLAN Information Channel This is the channel number used by the P 870HN 51D now P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Status This field displays the status of WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Click this to go to the screen where you can change it AP Information ESSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the P 870HN 51D in this wireless network Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Status This shows the current status of the wireless network Security This shows the level of wireless security the P 870HN 51D is using in this wireless network System Status System This field displays how long the P 870HN 51D has been running since it Uptime last started up The P 870HN 5
85. the default syntax you must use when entering them on the command line Some commands require additional parameters in order to execute properly Some may have optional parameters Parameters are displayed as follows command parameter P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting For example the date command has the optional t and date parameters If you do not use either of them and enter just date by itself then the system shows you the date it is currently using and then prompts you to change it C gt date The current date is 2009 10 21 Enter the new date mm dd yy However if you use the t parameter it just displays the date and nothing more C gt date t 2009 10 21 Cis To view the parameters for any given command enter help command ipconfig The ipconfig command line utility allows you to display current network TCP IP configuration settings and in some cases adjust them When you have network connectivity problems the first thing you should do is run this command to ensure that your device or computer does in fact have an IP address as well as display the source of that IP address such as a default gateway Syntax ipconfig Parameters ipconfig release renew There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt ipconfig W
86. the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates You can use the P 870HN 51D to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority P 870HN 51D User s Guide 147 Chapter 10 Certificate 10 3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security gt Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen This is the P 870HN 51D s summary list of certificates and certification requests Figure 72 Local Certificates Local Certificates Local Certificates Add View or Remove certificates from this page Local certificates are used by peers to verify your identity Maximum 4 certificates can be stored The certificate file must be in one of the following formats PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 Name Jinuse subject Type faction example vi CN example_1 O example_2 ST OK C US request n Load Signed Remove Create Certificate Request Import Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommend
87. the last 1 day period SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs since the last 1 day period UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS since the last 1 day period LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures since the last 1 day period LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures since the last 1 day period Previousl day This indicates VDSL performance information recorded in the past one time day FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures in the past one day CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s in the past one day ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs in the past one day SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs in the past one day UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS in the past one day LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures in the past one day LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures in the past one day Total time This indicates the number of packets transmitted received through the VDSL connection since the last reset FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures since the connection is up CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s since the connection
88. this screen Use this screen to view the WAN statistics Figure 21 Status gt WAN Service Statistics WAN Services Statistics a eo I S a aa Eoee ore ee e oen ptmo_1 ipoe_0_0_1i_1 1471470 5005 Refresh Interval bo sec Set Interval Stop P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Status gt WAN Service Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface used by this connection A default name ipoaO pppoal atmx where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values or ptmO indicates the DSL port The pppx name where x starts from 0 and is the index number of PPP connection on the P 870HN 51D indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface the physical Ethernet WAN port The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection The number after the underscore _ represents the index number of connections through the same interface null means the entry is not valid Description This shows the descriptive name of this connection 0 and 35 or O and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent thr
89. to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the P 870HN 51D act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the P 870HN 51D to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue IPoE This screen displays when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 34 WAN Configuration IPoE WAN IP Settings IAID DUID type Identifier Manufacturer OUI Product class Model name Serial nmuber WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings Notice If Obtain an IP address automatically is chosen DHCP client will be enabled If Use the following Static IP address is chosen enter the WAN IP address subnet mask and interface gateway Obtain an IP address automatically 7 Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor class Identifier foo1scboo0001 Enable DHCP Option 61 7 Enable DHCP Option 125 Use the following Static IP address WAN gateway IP Address DUID EN z 5c68137a 0019cb P 870HN Sid P 870HN Sid fooiscbooo001 m Back Next P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WA
90. to remove just that IP address inet_addr The s parameter allows you to add entries based on IP address inet_addr and or MAC address et h_addr There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting route To check the ARP table on a Windows XP computer Click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt The Command Prompt screen appears Type arp a and press Enter The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt arp a Interface 172 16 1 28 on Interface 0x1000003 Internet Address Physical Address Type 172164155 00 00 aa 19 07 38 dynamic PYZ LG LeS 00 18 f3 f0 aa 34 dynamic 172 16 1 44 00 0e a6 2c 60 10 dynamic 172 1614 210 00 19 cbh e9 66 33 dynamic 172 16 1 254 00 04 80 4c a8 05 dynamic In this example the Physical Address indicates the associated MAC address A Type entry with dynamic means it was dynamically learned through an ARP response Use the arp s inet_addr eth_addr to manually add an ARP entry if you want your computer to connect to the host with the specified MAC address when you access the specified IP address You can additionally check whether the MAC address associated with the IP address that you are looking for is correct In some circumstances your ARP table may keep a wrong MAC address until the entry expires You can then manually update the ARP
91. unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundatio
92. unique identifier assigned by the vendor This field is available when you select DUI D EN in the DUI D Type field Enable DHCP Select this to add vendor specific information to DHCP requests that Option 125 the P 870HN 51D sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Manufacturer Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique Identifier It is usually OUI the first three bytes of the MAC address Product Class Enter the product class of the P 870HN 51D Model Name Enter the model name of the P 870HN 51D Serial Number Enter the serial number of the P 870HN 51D Use the following Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address WAN IP Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Address WAN Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask WAN gateway Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP IP Address Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 4 NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation The screen is available only when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 35 WAN Configuration NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation Network Address Translation Settings Network Address Translation NAT allows you to share one Wide Area Network WAN IP address for multiple computer
93. up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 27 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list
94. you chose 128 bit in the WEP Encryption field then enter 13 characters ASCII string or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F preceded by Ox for each key 7 4 3 WPA 2 PSK In order to configure and enable WPA 2 PSK authentication click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 47 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 PSK Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection 6 z Bandwidth 20MHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL I Auto Generate Key I Hide Network Name SSID BSSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C Security Mode VAPA2 PSK 7 M Active Compatible WPA PSK Compatible x Encryption AES hd Pre Shared Key 12345678 Group Key Update Timer sec ReKey Method NONE 7 q Note ReKey Method means encryption keys are automatically changed after specified by 1 TIME period of time 1 seconds 2 None Disable Rekey Method MAC Filter Edit Apply Reset P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 07 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 27 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Generate This field is only available for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Key Select this option to have the P 870HN 51D automatically generate an SSID and pre shared key The SSID and Pre Shared Key fields will not be configurable when you select
95. 0 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 69 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 IP address assigned by ISP P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT P 870HN 51D User s Guide Firewall 9 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the P 870HN 51D firewall settings The P 870HN 51D firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access based on the source destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Incoming screen lets you view and configure incoming IP filtering rules Section 9 3 on page 142 9 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP IP TCP IP in turn is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions
96. 1 1 Remote Management Overview This chapter explains how to configure the remote management and access control settings on the P 870HN 51D What You Can Do in this Chapter The TR 069 screen lets you configure the P 870HN 51D s TR 069 auto configuration settings Section 16 3 on page 193 The TR 064 screen lets you enable management via TR 064 on the P 870HN 51D Section 16 3 on page 193 The Service Control screens let you configure through which interface s users can use which service s to manage the P 870HN 51D Section 16 4 on page 194 The IP Address screens let you configure from which IP address es users can use a service to manage the P 870HN 51D Section 16 5 on page 195 16 2 The TR 069 Screen TR 069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment CPE for example your P 870HN 51D can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls RPCs between an ACS and a client device RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language XML format over HTTP or HTTPS An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the P 870HN 51D modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the P 870HN 51D You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 16 Remote Management Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT to open th
97. 1 Mode to 802 11g Only or 802 11n Only Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 9 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see the appendix P 870HN 51D User s Guide 117 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 9 1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 56 Example of a Wireless Network Mag A _ The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your P 870HN 51D is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set Dentity e If two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information e Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network P 870HN 51D User s Guide C
98. 10 lt 250 011100 011010 011000 6 6 4 100110 100100 100010 100000 5 101110 101000 7 7 6 110000 7 111000 14 8 2 Traffic Policing Meter Types Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Simple Token Bucket is similar to tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted The bucket is a buffer that temporarily stores outgoing packets and transmits them at an average rate Single Rate Three Color Marker SRTCM and Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM evaluate incoming packets and mark them with one of three colors which P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS refer to packet loss priority PLP levels High PLP level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The difference between the two meters is the types of parameters used to evaluate packets SRTCM uses committed information rate CIR the committed burst size and the excess burst size TRTCM uses peak information rate PIR CIR peak burst size and a committed burst size After SRTCM and TRTCM are configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets e Red high loss priority level packets are dropped
99. 1D User s Guide log into remote host systems Appendix F Common Services Table 112 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution P 870HN 51D User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for P 870HN 51D 1 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only
100. 1D assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups Each group acts as an independent network on the P 870HN 51D 19 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screen lets you create multiple networks on the P 870HN 51D Section 19 2 on page 213 19 2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group Alternatively you can have the P 870HN 51D automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to the new group when its source MAC address or DHCP option information matches the predefined filtering criteria Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the P 870HN 51D assigns to the clients in the default and or user defined groups If you set the P 870HN 51D to assign IP addresses based on the client s source MAC address or DHCP option information you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP IP settings for both the default and user defined groups See Chapter 6 on page 91 for more information P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 19 Interface Group In the following example the client that sends packets with the source MAC address 00 19 cb 01 23 45 is assigned the IP address 192 168 2 2 and uses the WAN interface ptm0_2 Figure 120 Interface Grouping Application G2 00 19 cb 01 23 45 Click Advanced Setup gt Interface Group to open the following screen Figure 121 Interface Group
101. 1D starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart or when you reset it see Section 1 6 on page 25 Current This field displays the current date and time in the P 870HN 51D You Date Time can change this in Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting System This displays whether the P 870HN 51D is functioning as a router or a Mode bridge CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the P 870HN 51D s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the P 870HN 51D is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using QoS see Chapter 14 on page 169 Memory This field displays what percentage of the P 870HN 51D s memory is Usage currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the P 870HN 51D is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Section 22 4 on page 232 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the P 870HN 51D has Status This field indicates whether or not the P 870HN 51D is using the interface For the DSL interface this field displays LinkDown line is down or Up line is up or connected For the LAN or Ethernet WAN inte
102. 2ms TTL 236 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 162ms TTL 236 Ping statistics for 192 0 32 10 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 152ms Maximum 162ms Average 156ms C gt A long ping response could indicate network problems on your side of the connection e between the start and end points of the connection e on the receiving end To determine where the slowdown is you may need to use traceroute P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting tracert The tracert command line utility allows you to determine the network path between your computer and a host you specify When you communicate with other devices on a network the data is not often sent directly from point A to point B rather it moves through a series of intermediate servers passed along until eventually the server closest to point B hands it off directly This command can be useful for helping determine whether your connection issues are happening locally somewhere in transit or at the destination end e Each step in the chain of connections is called a hop e The time it takes for a server at any given hop to pass the data packet is called latency and is measured in milliseconds When a tracert command is run it sends out a burst of three data packets per hop The results table therefore always displays three values for latenc
103. 33 2 ih To delete the route to the default route with the gateway of 192 168 1 254 type route delete 0 0 0 0 mask 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 e To add a route to the destination 172 16 2 0 with the subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 the next hop address of 172 16 1 250 and the cost metric of 7 type route add 172 16 2 0 mask 255 255 255 0 172 16 1 250 metric 7 e To add a persistent route to the destination 172 16 3 0 with the subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 and the next hop address of 172 16 1 252 type route p add 172 16 3 0 mask 255 255 255 0 172 16 1 252 Note that the metric will be set to 1 if you do not specify any P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting netstat The netstat command line utility is used to show Ethernet statistics and current TCP IP network connections Syntax netstat With no parameters this command simply displays only active statistics for ports that are currently in use by one process or another Parameter netstat a e The a parameter displays all available listening ports and connections whether they are active or not while the e parameter displays Ethernet statistics There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now The following examples show the typical output of this command
104. 5 forgot the password 1 The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is user 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 6 on page 25 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is https 192 168 1 1 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting e If you changed the IP address Section on page 96 use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the P 870HN 51D 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 299 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the P 870HN 51D with the default IP address See Section 1 6 on page 25 5 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port e Try to access the P 870HN 51D using another service such as Telnet If you can access the P 870HN 51D check the remote management setti
105. 5 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Ga mw Privacy Security Advanced Block pop up windows Exceptions IV Load images automatically Exceptions IV Enable JavaScript Advanced IV Enable Java r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman 7 Size 16 v Advanced Colors r File Types HE H Configure how Firefox handles certain types of files Manage Cancel Help 4 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 307 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions P 870HN 51D User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network nu
106. 51D 10 4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Advanced Setup gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the following screen This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the P 870HN 51D to accept as trusted The P 870HN 51D accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Figure 78 Trusted CA Trusted CA Certificate Authority Certificates Add View or Remove certificates from this page CA certificates are used by you to verify peers certificates Maximum 4 certificates can be stored The certificate file must be in one of the following formats PEM Base 64 encoded 509 Name Subject type Action view example CN example_1 O example_2 ST OK C US ca view Trusted CA Remove Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 52 Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have un
107. 51D has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the P 870HN 51D or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release_Co nfiguration This button is available when the WPS status is Configured but not configurable if you disable WPS Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the P 870HN 51D Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 The WPS Station Screen Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration PBC or PIN Configuration Note If you select No Security in the Wireless LAN gt General screen and click Push Button in the WPS Station screen the P 870HN 51D automatically changes to use WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mixed mode and generates a pre shared key Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station The following screen displays Figure 54 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station WPS Station Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network Push
108. 55 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 99 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE aria nai dire 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 _ 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 311 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the addres
109. AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 205 RTS CTS i RTS Range CTS Range Wireless AP Station ee ee foe B E g Stations cannot ACK a S hear each other They can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send
110. AT router Dial on Demand Select this check box when you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Inactivity Timeout field Inactivity Specify an idle time out when you select Dial on Demand The Timeout default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout Use Static Pv4 A static Pv4 address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic Address IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to use a static IP address instead of a dynamic IP address IPv4 Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Enable PPP Debug Mode Select this option to display PPP debugging messages on the console P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 17 WAN Configuration PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Select this option to forward PPPoE packets from the WAN port to the LAN ports and from the LAN ports to the WAN port In addition to the P 870HN 51D s built in PPPoE client you can select this to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the P 870HN 51D Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address This is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Clear this if you do not need
111. B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information Windows 7 1 2 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 153 Windows 7 Start Menu BS Snipping Tool Calculator F lt A XPS Viewer EY n gA Windows Fax and Scan ae Magnifier gt All Programs Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support ee ca In the Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category Figure 154 Windows 7 Control Panel E Control Panel gt S Al Adjust your computer s settings K System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Network and Internet View network status and tasks 7 Hardware and Sound A View devices and printers Add a device kal Programs Uninstall a program x oose homegroup and sharing options OFE View by Category 7 User Accounts and Family Safety is Add or remove user accounts id Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust scr
112. BB 0 b2 A2pv6C030h d22k PTM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Renew 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server 6 Unconfigured ZyXEL Active Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK Refresh Interval None System Status System Uptime 0 days 3 hours 44 minutes Current Date Time 01 Jan 2000 03 46 57 System Mode Routing Bridging CPU Usage Memory Usage Rate kbps kbps N A N A N A 100M Full Link Down NoLink NoLink NoLink Up Unconfigured 150M More Status WAN Service Statistics Route Info WLAN Station List VDSL Statistics LAN Statistics Client List esse MCLE P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts A navigation panel e B main window e C status bar 3 2 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure P 870HN 51D features The following tables describe each menu item Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the P 870HN 51D s general device and network status information Use this screen to access the statistics and client list Network WAN Layer 2 Use this screen to add or remove a DSL PTM Packet Transfer Interface Mode interface Internet Use this screen to configure ISP parameters WAN IP address Connection assignment and other advanced
113. CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please se
114. CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes Ssh server dropbear v0 46 under the MIT Style License The MIT License Copyright c lt year gt lt copyright holders gt Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction in
115. Conventions e The P 2812HNU 51c may be referred to as the P 870HN 51D the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font e A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard e Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices e A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen e Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 870HN 51D User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The P 870HN 51D icon is not an exact representation of your device P 870HN 51D Computer Notebook computer Firewall Tele
116. DESCRIPTION Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask here Mask Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the WAN screens Use Gateway Select this option and enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The IP Address gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your P 870HN 51D s interface s The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Route P 870HN 51D User s Guide Policy Forwarding 12 1 Overview Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the P 870HN 51D takes the shortest path to forward a packet Policy forwarding allows the P 870HN 51D to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to outgoing pack
117. DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection A default name ipoaO pppoal or ptmO indicates the DSL port The pppx name where x starts from 0 and is the index number of PPP connection on the P 870HN 51D indicates a PPP connection The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection The number after the underscore _ represents the index number of connections through the same interface null means the entry is not valid Description This is the service name of this connection O and 35 or O and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection null means the entry is not valid Type This shows the layer 2 interface type and method of encapsulation used by this connection Rate This shows the maximum data rate in Kbps allowed for traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no limit on transmission rate P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 14 Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Vlan8021p This indicates the 802 1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned VianMuxld This indicates the VLAN ID number assigne
118. DIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another A
119. DSL modem or router in your netwrok 3 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet layer 2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP 4 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time You can only use one type of DSL connection either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time cannot create multiple connections of the same type Your layer 2 interface must be in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC mode to create multiple WAN serivces for each connection cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the P 870HN 51D but my Internet connection is not available anymore P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 23 2 Turn the P 870HN 51D off and on 3 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 5 on page 23 If the P 870HN 51D is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the
120. E LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements 10 11 DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time b
121. Example pa e 8 Symmetric NAT The full restricted and port restricted cone NAT types use the same mapping for an outgoing packet s source address regardless of the destination IP address and port In symmetric NAT the mapping of an outgoing packet s source address to a source address in another network is different for each different destination IP address and port In the following example the P 870HN 51D maps the source address IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network for packets sent to IP address 3 and port C The P 870HN 51D uses a different mapping IP address 2 and port M for packets sent to IP address 4 and port D A host on the external network IP address 3 and port C for example can only send packets to the internal host via the external IP address and port that the NAT router used in sending a packet to the external host s IP address and port So in P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup the example only 3 C is allowed to send packets to 2 B and only 4 D is allowed to send packets to 2 M Figure 40 Symmetric NAT 3 C et aa on Ne ae Ag Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the s
122. Figure 184 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager amp KNetworkManager a Wired Devices X Wired Network Dial Up Connections P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 185 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager a Device Addresse Received Bytes 2317441 MBytes 2 2 Packets 3621 Errors 0 Dropped 0 KBytes s 0 0 C Statistics Transmitted 841875 0 8 3140 0 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 186 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Po
123. G Address Filter si scicsisccerisseeiiins pera ioraesananeneiaetinn nanvenerientaes 36 2 oon UP NAT Pon POPC osiin anaa ia aAa aait 37 2a PR PORVOO E E E 37 2 5 Access the Pea ORIN Tl Using DONS sssiniiiieair iniiae ENAA NAAA 38 2 5 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org sssssssssssssssrresinsssrsesrnesrressreesses 39 259 2 Configuring DONS On Your P E70HN 91D cccsistcicicccncctctnccnteeadicteatecciegsinenedocasauepescnans 39 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Lat Table of Contents Ee lesing ihe DONS SUNY soniais aradin EEA A E tea ets 40 2 6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ccccsccecessesteeeeeesenteeeeeseeaaes 40 2 7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ssicicsssisscecssmctecsccsnisencsaniascersimatasnienadiancrmdacecess 43 Chapter 3 introducing the Web Configurat t x caiisssesnnssssasinisacsinnsnannscnaceioonasiaisasaisarsetaaneuiasaassninieanuunaiaiie 47 Si Web OLNEY ciuine A aAa Eiaa E A 47 3 11 Accessing THE Web Conigurator scccscamdestencalagincazsnadaets a eena 47 Soe Wep Conioutator Man SaN murni aR A NaN 48 eTR T PEE sist ctithigscsencsthpgssasite en eliaudasuaisutty asi mpclbea tier santviesacente eatiuntetiaaes 49 Bee ok I NINAO oorr E santuaneeoekedonuendieeGhemebacaies 51 A e ANRA EEN LEE ste PE EL T AEEA IA and dase E N V I EAN TO AEN Si Part Il Technical Reference cccccsecsseeeseeeeeeeeneseneecneeseeeeeeeessenesenes 53 Chapter 4 SS S 2 n ee S 55 AVS MR
124. Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 93 Firmware Specifications continued Other Protocol Support PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support RFC 1213 IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy Management Embedded Web Configurator Remote Firmware Upgrade Telnet Embedded FTP TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore CLI Command Line Interpreter SSH Secure Shell function Syslog TR 069 TR 064 The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the P 870HN 51D Table 94 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 1 IGMP v1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 IGMP v2 RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802
125. HETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com 352 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tj h cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use i
126. IP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface Select Active to have the P 870HN 51D advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings Apply Save Click Apply Save to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 14 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand Configure QoS on the P 870HN 51D to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves these steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow The P 870HN 51D assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both tho
127. Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate Certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the P 870HN 51D 10 3 1 Create Certificate Request Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the My Certificate Create screen Use this screen to have the P 870HN 51D generate a certification request Figure 73 Create Certificate Request Certificate Name Common Name Organization Name Create new certificate request To generate a certificate signing request you need to include Common Name Organization Name State Province Name and the 2 letter Country Code for the certificate State Province Name Country Region Name US United States z Back Apply m The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Create Certificate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this certificate Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate s owner by IP address domain name or e mail address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation domain name or e mail address in the field provided The domain name or e mail address can be up to 31 ASCII characters The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Organiz
128. Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving your computer closer to the P 870HN 51D if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on 3 Turn the P 870HN 51D off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications 24 4 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting cannot access the P 870HN 51D or ping any computer from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the P 870HN 51D 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the P 870HN 51D 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the P 870HN 51D 5 Check that both the P 870HN 51D and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Check if MAC Filter is configured to deny wireless a
129. M modified redirect CEES CLS CT A TO 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptmo_i 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 U 0 bro 0 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 0 UG 0 ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status gt Route Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route s traffic Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route Flag This indicates the route status Up The route is up Reject The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail Gateway The route uses a gateway to forward traffic Host The target of the route is a host Reinstate The route is reinstated for dynamic routing Dynamic redirect The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect Modified redirect The route is modified from a routing daemon or rederict Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost The smaller the number the lower the cost P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 6 Status gt Route Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route Interface This
130. MP proxy Multicast Proxy on this connection This allows the P 870HN 51D to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 5 Default Gateway The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 36 WAN Configuration Default Gateway Routing Default Gateway Select a preferred wan interface as the system default gateway Selected WAN Interface fipoe_0_0_1_1 ptrn0_1 z Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 WAN Configuration Default Gateway PPPoE PPPOA IPoE or IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Selected Default Select a WAN interface through which you want to forward the traffic Gateway Interfaces Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 6 DNS Server The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 37 WAN Configuration DNS Server DNS Server Configuration Get DNS server information from the selected WAN interface OR enter static DNS server IP addresses If only a single P C with IPoA or static MER protocol is configu
131. N 51D User s Guide 1 71 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 60 QoS General LABEL DESCRIPTION Upstream This field is ignored if traffic matches a class you previously configured in traffic priority the Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup screen will be automatically f traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen assigned by the P 870HN 51D assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on what you select in this field Ethernet Priority I P Precedence and or Packet Length See Section 14 8 1 on page 185 for more information on these traffic priority schemes If you do not configure this field traffic which does not match a class is mapped to queue two Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 4 The Queue Setup Screen Click QoS gt Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Figure 88 QoS Queue Setup Queue Setup Queue Setup Create anew Queue Add maximum 7 configurable entries for WAN port upstream and maximum 3 configurable entries for LAN WLAN downstream The QoS function has been disabled Queues would not take effects Xs Active Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit Modify 1 Vv Qi WAN 1 al DT 1000 g i Apply The following table describes the labels in this scree
132. N Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 WAN Configuration IPoE automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP Enable DHCP Option 60 Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the P 870HN 51D in DHCP requests that the P 870HN 51D sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Vendor Class Enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 such as the type of the Identifier hardware or firmware Enable DHCP Select this to identify the P 870HN 51D in DHCP requests that the P Option 61 870HN 51D sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier IAID of the P 870HN 51D For example the WAN connection index number DUID Type Select Other to enter any string that identifies the P 870HN 51D in the DUID field Select DUI D LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the P 870HN 51D s hardware address that is the MAC address in the DUI D field Select DUID EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered private enterprise number DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier DUID of the P 870HN 51D Identifier Enter a
133. Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength Seeeeeoc 6 Link Quality 90008800 0 01 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured If you cannot access the web site try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen check the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator 2 2 3 2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time you use the wireless client You can also configure different profiles for different 32 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials networks for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an access point configured for WPA PSK security In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 the profile name is PN_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next Click Add to con
134. P 870HN 51D Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your P 870HN 51D that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 870HN 51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 870HN 51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not cr
135. P 870HN 51D 802 11n Wireless VDSL2 4 port Gateway Jefault Login Details IP Address _ https 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 1 01 Edition 1 07 2010 ZyXEL ight 2010 Communications Corporation www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the P 870HN 51D using the web configurator Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com ET ET Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File P 870HN 51D User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Download Library Search for the latest product update
136. P 870HN 51D has a built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability DHCP Relay You can also configure the P 870HN 51D to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers Multicast and IGMP Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data There are two versions 1 and 2 IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup DNS DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask 6 3 The LAN IP Screen Click Network gt LAN to open the IP screen See Section 6 4 on
137. P address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection or trace the route packets take to Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered Traceoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified host P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 23 Diagnostic 23 4 The 802 1ag Screen Click Diagnostic to open the following screen Use this screen to perform CFM actions Figure 139 802 1ag 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management 802 1ag is supported in PTM mode Maintenance Domain MD Name Maintenance Domain MD Level 2 z Maintenance Association MA Name Maintenance Association MA Format integer Destination MAC Address D Count booo 802 1Q VLAN ID 0 4095 boo E Maintenance End Point ID 1 8191 Status Continuity Check Message CCM Sent CCM 0 invalid CCM No cross connect CCM No Loopback Message LBM Linktrace Message LTM Save Enable CCM Disable CCM Update CC status Send Loopback Send Linktrace The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 91 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this Domain MD MD Name The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44
138. P mark Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D 14 6 1 Policer Setup Add Edit Figure 93 QoS gt Policer Edit Policer M Enable Name Meter Type Simple Token Bucket z Committed Rate kbps Committed Burst Size kbytes Conforming Action Pass he Non Conforming Action Drop a Regulated Classes Member Setting Available Class Cl 4 1 ass Add gt gt Remove Back Apply Cancel Selected Class P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 QoS gt Policer Setup Edit Classes Member Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this to have the P 870HN 51D pass drop or mark packets that exceed the committed rate and or committed burst size specified in this screen Meter Type Select the method that the P 870HN 51D uses for determining which packets to pass drop or mark DSCP Choices are Simple Token Bucket Single Rate Three Color Meter and Two Rate Three Color Meter Refer to Section 14 8 2 on page 186 for information on these meter types Committed Enter the maximum committed rate for the specified cla
139. PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface 122 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices 2 Access the WPS section of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this 3 Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the P 870HN 51D see Section 7 6 on page 113 4 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s
140. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up RFC2516 connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out PPPoE dial on demand Packet Filters Your device s packet filtering function allows added network security and management VDSL Standards Maximum data rate downstream upstream 100 Mbps 100 Mbps VDSL line coding ITU T G 993 2 DMT modulation Tranceivers ITU T G 993 1 DSL handshake procedure protocol ITU T G 994 1 DSL physical layer management protocol ITU T G 997 1 VDSL band plan 997 and 998 Support UO band VDSL profiles 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a and 30a VDSL speed up to 100 100 Mbps 700 feet Support Annex A Annex B Rate adaptation OLR Bit Swapping SRA Seamless Rate Adaption Upstream power back off UPBO VDSL OAM communication channels Indicator bits 1B channel VDSL embedded operations channel EOC and VDSL overhead control channel VOC Erasure and Broadcom PhyR PHY Level Retransmission Technology PTM mode Trellis coding INP capability At least two symbols protection INP_MIN 2 up to 16 symbols INP_MIN 16 P 870HN 51D User s
141. PTION UserName Type the user name you use to access the system Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the P 870HN 51D Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 3 The Time Setting Screen To change your P 870HN 51D s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the P 870HN 51D s time based on your local time zone Figure 125 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting Current Time Current Time Current Date manual Time Setting Time and Date Setup New Time hh mm ss New Date yyyy mmi dd Get from Time Server First NTP time server Second NTP time server Third NTP time server Fourth NTP time server Fifth NTP time server Time zone offset 03 58 18 01 Jan 2000 ira Apply Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 20 System Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 85 Maintenance gt Sy
142. Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or
143. QoS Class Setup Add Class Configuration I Enable Class Name Classification Order Last Forward To Interface Junchange Sd DSCP Mark Junchanse E 0 63 802 1P Mark Junchange VLAN ID Tag Junchange 14094 To Queue Oy Criteria Configuration Basic From Interface cam x I Ether Type IP 0x80 7 Source 7 MAC Address MAC Mask I Exclude P IP Address IP Subnet Mask M Exclude 7 TCP UDP Port Range I Exclude Destination I MAC Address MAC Mask I exclude I IP Address IP Subnet Mask I exclude I TCP UDP Port Range Pe I exclude Others m 8021P pe I Exclude VLAN ID 14095 I Exclude 7 IP Protocol Ter wl T Exclude I IP Packet Length o z ae L I Exclude m DSCP __ to 63 IT exclude I TCP ack I Exclude T DHCP Vendor Class D DHCP Options A y I Exclude q Note Support DHCP options only when routing mode Bet ee ane 176 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 QoS Class Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Enable Select to enable or disable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clickin
144. RIPTION User Name Enter the name of the user MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this schedule applies Days of the week Select check boxes for the days that you want the P 870HN 51D to perform parental control Start Blocking Enter the time period of each day in 24 hour format during which Time parental control will be enforced End Blocking Time Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Save Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 870HN 51D 18 3 The URL Filter Screen Use this screen to configure URL filtering settings to allow or block the users on your network from accessing certian web sites Click Advanced Setup gt Parental Control gt URL Filter to open the following screen Figure 118 Parental Control gt URL Filter URL Filter maximum of 100 entries can be configured M Enable URL Filter Blocking list a active address Port Modify 1 Vv www example com 80 g Ww Ada Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 79 Parental Control gt URL Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable URL Filter Select the check box to enable URL filtering on the P 870HN 51D This is the index number of the rule P 870HN 51D User s Guide 211 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 79 Parental Control gt URL Filter contin
145. S INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE P 870HN 51D User s Guide 353 Appendix G Open Software Announcements The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence P 870HN 51D User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is
146. Service Enter a name to identify this rule This field is read only if you click the Edit Name icon in the Trigger Port screen WAN Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules Interface Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the Start Port P 870HN 51D to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Trigger End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Port Trigger Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Protocol P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 40 NAT gt Port Triggering gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Open Start The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses Port when it sends out a particular service The P 870HN 51D forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Open End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Port Open Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Protocol Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your c
147. T E E A E E E P A E E E 197 1 3 mhe UPF OGO na 198 174 Installing UPNP n Wrngows EXON acisictcinssncadtcandineienntasnetasencdeesesdancinerukecanineaianencrnesa 199 17 5 Using UPNP in Windows XP EXamMple ccc ccccsstscisacdasttcrsenunaand waaddanascnsauuusas anana kanaa 202 Chapter 18 Parental COMTO siscsciccicsccssasscresccscsncrcascecdercntasseieseoiainascacsiecandaieniainwaranusdttiiescccairetaaataradenani 209 TT OVENI ON nciaicd ancedessqcateadisacentnandics abtedesaneanindadac caendacics aberdesseconiadusaccatnandaecentaddtseininaadicnmrneeas 209 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 18 1 1 What You Gan Do in this Chapa ssnissriarensnormssiiiinitiii inniinn N 209 10 2 ihe Nme FeSO Scree muiere aa e S AN AA aaan 209 18a Adding A SONG OUIG siros aa iaia O a Er Ea a 210 Tae The UU SBR Slit geil lt 1 aaaea T NA 211 16 21 PCCW URL Fiter cuz cserpiesia acne ccrwaasicosesreaan AE Ae 212 Chapter 19 Interlace Group ee ne ee ears 213 WE OVENS ERS petit aaenteenla cance TE 213 19311 What You Gan Deri this Chapter sccccnnseisssecssuitassiveiesiotuslucstavenesnewetieioniuiiucd 213 19 2 The WC roun SGN ass scrdeteiscdeteastcetisegeadaaente dd eaiean a ASN 213 192 1 Ipnierace Gion GConiguratiori cnssissssatceinaseisutcanprtdvaasarcakineaserendasmadvanmnima deals 215 192 2 be BCS Grouping Critien aicasoresaracevioseebaciadaseacsaioonesasats sani ETER A D 216 Chapter 20 OUT SU aac eed a a EE a a aE Eaa E a las aaa 219 eG iiarces nea
148. VIZ 1 EE VIZ 616 1432 1 TI72 16 1 632 255 255 259 255 127 0 0 1 EZ Ta OL 1 LIZ LOr 259259 2595255 2559 3299 T2417 6 51232 V7 2 A641 32 1 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 TID 16231 32 122 Los L32 1 259 2550 255255 255255 255 255 17216132 172 16 1 32 1 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 Persistent Routes None The following table describes labels shown in the command output Table 95 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Active Routes This section lists all available routes that are automatically learned from the network Network Destination ignore it network The destination IP address of packets that this route entry is to route The destination can be an IP address for a network or host 0 0 0 0 for the default route or 127 0 0 0 for the loopback interface which is used mainly for self test The destination 224 0 0 0 is for multicasting packets or reserved for testing But if you are not using multicast applications just The destination 255 255 255 255 is used to find computers when an IP address is not known For example before the DHCP IP address of your computer is determined your computer sends packets with the destination looking for DHCP servers on the P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Table 95 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this route entry is to route The subnet mask can be
149. WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN gt General screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note If you select WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN gt General screen the WDS and WPS features are not available on the P 870HN 51D Figure 48 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection E 7 Bandwidth 2omHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL _0001 7 Hide Network Name SSID BSSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C Security Mode I Active Compatible Encryption Group Key Update Timer lo sec Rekey Method Prine 7 q Note ReKey Method means encryption keys are automatically changed after specified by 1 TIME period of time 1 seconds 2 None Disable Rekey Method Authentication Server IP Address Port Number io Shared Secret MAC Filter Edit Apply Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 28 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box Active This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the P Compatible 870HN 51D to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKI P AES for data encryption Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless cli
150. What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them alone 7 4 The General Screen Note If you are configuring the P 870HN 51D from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 870HN 51D s SSID or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P 870HN 51D s new settings P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 44 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection 5 7 Bandwidth 20mHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL l Auto Generate Key 7 Hide Network Name SSID BSSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C Security Mode WPA PSK M Active Compatible WPA PSK Compatible 7 Encryption TKIP aES Pre Shared Key fizsase78 Group Key Update Timer booo sec ReKey Method NONE q Note ReKey Method means encryption keys are automatically changed after specified by 1 TIME period of time 1 seconds 2 None Disable Rekey Method MAC Filter Edit Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL
151. ad only text box displays the request information in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form This displays null in a signed certificate Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Load Signed This button is available only in a certification request details screen Certificate Click this to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the request 10 3 4 Load Signed Certificate Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Load Signed or the Load Signed Certificate button in the Certificate Details screen of a certification request to open the Load Certificate screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save a valid certificate to repalce the request P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate Figure 77 Load Certificate Certificate Load certificate Paste signed certificate Certificate exemple SCS Name Back Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Load Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field is read only and displays the identifying name of this certificate Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 870HN 51D Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 870HN
152. address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world 8 3 The Port Forwarding Screen This summary screen provides a summary of all port forwarding rules and their configuration In addition this screen allows you to create new port forwarding rules and delete existing rules You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow
153. ader tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHOP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers P 870HN 51D User s Guide 337 Appendix F Common Services Table 112 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC_TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 T
154. adios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges e A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer e An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points e An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information Network Names Each network must have a name referred to as the SSID Service Set Dentifier The service set is the network so the service set identifier is the network s name This helps you identify your wireless network when wireles
155. ame group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The
156. are 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s AGGREGAT
157. assword P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon Figure 180 openSUSE 10 3 YaST Control Center YaST Control Center linux h20z File Edit Help D Software A Network Services Novell AppArmor Q Security and Users gt Miscellaneous 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button Figure 181 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings YaST2 linux h20z Network Card a Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot IP address assigned using DHCP d Configure Abort P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Addr
158. ates the number of received packets dropped on this interface Transmitted Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Refresh Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the P 870HN 51D as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the P 870HN 51D provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Click Status gt Client List to open the following screen The read only DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the P 870HN 51D s DHCP server Figure 26 Status gt Client List Client List Hostname
159. ation Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the P 870HN 51D drops trailing spaces State Province Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located You may use any character including spaces but the P 870HN 51D drops trailing spaces Country Region Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is P 870HN 51D User s Guide located Chapter 10 Certificate Table 48 Create Certificate Request continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation After you click Apply the Certificate Request Details screen displays Click Load Signed Certificate to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the request see Section 10 3 4 on page 153 Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen See Section 10 3 3 on page 152 for field information Figure 74 Certificate Request Details Certificate Request Details Certificate signing request successfully created Note a request is not yet functional have it signed by a Certificate Authority and load the signed certificate to this device Name ZyXEL Type request Subject CN TW O
160. ation Protocol See DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 329 DYNDNS wildcard 189 E EAP Authentication 328 ECHO 139 Encapsulation 84 MER 84 PPP over Ethernet 85 encryption 330 WEP 107 ESS 322 ESSID 57 Extended Service Set Dentification 104 Extended Service Set See ESS 322 F FCC interference statement 355 Finger 139 firmware upload 228 upload error 229 firmware version 56 fragmentation threshold 325 FTP 130 139 H hidden node 323 host 220 host name 56 HTTP 139 141 142 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 228 humidity 247 IANA 97 317 IBSS 321 IEEE 802 11g 325 IEEE 802 1Q 87 IGMP 88 92 97 version 88 IGMP proxy 250 IGMP v1 250 IGMP v2 250 importing certificates 150 153 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 321 initialization vector IV 331 install UPnP 199 Windows Me 199 Windows XP 200 Integrated Access Device 21 internal routing table 60 Internet access 21 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index See IANA 317 IP Address 137 IP address 96 IP Address Assignment 85 IP filter basics 141 creating or eiding rules 144 introduction 141 policies 142 IP multicasting 250 IP pool 94 IP pool setup 96 ipconfig 255 ipconfig release 256 ipconfig renew 256 L LAN statistics 62 66 LAN TCP IP 96 LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration 193 LBR 236 link trace 236 Link Trace Message see LTM Link Trace Response see LTR logs 223 o
161. bNF pDN3 WEVTZAKEA iDwkO2nFIBs EbETtH3 CeROFtOQNnjbNWN11j3k2a0SPaASkzfEZIMmxalKoyqkgSkqTyn DLH7w 8m f4br8dIT ROJBANBTLOZNCoBXTYBSBPkGgnsdaJ yj BisV2UxvK ZhOQw6LeXzXMhNSs b1KitjmzoNwS Mqs4bibwxXhpODtselgV 2 RsCQOCkSqVcEYh 3 5p OY2stVUBs kO o0i5z2FIrasLeMcys qt luj 7I fDO7DpIvFoOrSs 6LCPXNB2 zFWUnftxleboOJ3 0VnVFAKBK nU amMNnH13K1iRWk39kCIknyFg193 hh6 Pull Dj zT 690sIDmCtNF 63EyNNF AGeSyB LeSc62SLLVMaxaRiTFj7akajfaYFaqvcVh mPc 69F yabKtxV72Zx6 H NN i qxBX1iu aP3htmFf AORMEUDLICFBu SmHPZIreTAakFaS9oS5GLFO Signing Request MIIBGTCB6WIBADBCMRIWEAYDVOODF Al leGFtcGx lXzExE AOQBGNVBAoUCIV4YU1w HGVENJIELMAKGALUECBNCTOsxC zaJBGNVBAYTALVTMIGENA0GCS AGS Ib3 DOEBAQUA ASGNADCBIOKBGODOzVS2 T qTiyJDQ6COVLPFSQwPh3 DeiVoUTeb2 9adNSRacnscio tB2fNyGKUxpareujTgjz5Z2uSPIVO407i Hie1lqFHPOQyrrGOusMXGGONZGTLEPEk RuRCil 6onNICpRMAdcwGTLYZazWYO6SGuUB1lzcj Z2XXOYxuCK7UFapMF pRwIDAQAB oLAWDOYIKoZ IhvcNAQEEBQADGYEAEu3c LOtJv UCnrJaYHuckShviPghkU 7vYOsk IVpOvNOY uuYr ZH4Xvyfa nfF IpOYGoY1Ho6d YfwceOPBiLauvsczZsstJqodtDrokNa fHValcRIooRkS9ZpCn3 OYEALZmq33 9e jhRgyNddXx pCnkacBR3hSSOQaL4OnDLily 720GbM Back Load Signed Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Certificate Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate You may use any character n
162. bytes Maintenance Select a level 0 7 under which you want to create an MA Domain MD Level Maintenance Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this Association MA MA Name The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44bytes P 870HN 51D User s Guide 237 Chapter 23 Diagnostic Table 91 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance Association MA Format Select the format which the P 870HN 51D uses to send this MA information in the domain MD Options are VID String and Integer If you select VID or Integer the P 870HN 51D adds the VLAN ID you specified for an MA in the CCM If you select String the P 870HN 51D adds the MA name you specified above in the CCM Note The MEPs in the same MA shoule use the same MA format Destination MAC Address Enter the target device s MAC address to which the P 870HN 51D performs a CFM loopback test Count Set how many times the P 870HN 51D send loopback messages LBMs 802 1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID 0 4095 for this MA Maintenance End Point ID Enter an ID number 1 8191 for this MEP port Each MEP port needs a unique ID number within an MD The MEP ID is to identify an MEP port used when you perform a CFM action Status Continuity Check Message CCM This shows how many Connectivity Check Messa
163. ccess Request message P 870HN 51D User s Guide 327 Appendix E Wireless LANs The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s fro
164. ccess point you must know its Service Set IDentity SSID and WPA PSK pre shared key In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 next Figure 7 ZyXEL Utility Site Survey Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown Available Network List ssb Chamel Signal T ZyXEL_MIS 6 62 T Z2yXEL_YZU 6 62 T ZyXEL_test 6 60 p SSID_Example3 54 if G CPE_5257_00 dlink4 300 50 ZI Connect Site Information Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 Channel 6 Security VWPA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks Click Scan if you want to search again If no entry displays in the Available Network List that means there is no wireless network available within range Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer When you try to connect to an AP with security configured a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the defa
165. ccess to certain MAC addresses to the P 870HN 51D See Chapter 7 Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting P 870HN 51D User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the P 870HN 51D s hardware and firmware features 25 1 Hardware Specifications Table 92 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 21 5 cm L x 12 3 cm W x 3 6 cm D Weight 417g Power Specification 12 VDC 1 5A Built in Switch Four auto negotiating auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports RESET Button 10 seconds Restores factory defaults Antennas One attached external dipole antenna 2dBi One internal antenna 2dBi WPS Button 1 second turn on or off WLAN 5 seconds enable WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Operation 02e C 402 C Temperature Storage Temperature 302 602 C Operation Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Humidity 20 90 RH 25 2 Firmware Specifications Table 93 Firmware Specifications Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits P 870HN 51D User s Guide 247 Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 93 Firmware Specifications continued Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 DHCP Server IP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 65 Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web co
166. ce provider IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The P 870HN 51D supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 NAT NAT includes multi to multi NAT SUA NAT Server port forwarding VPN IPSec PPTP and L2TP Pass Through NAT friendly applications NetMeeting Microsoft PPTP client MSN Messenger X Box Live TFTP FTP H 323 RTSP SIP ALG Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your P 870HN 51D You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logs Use logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the P 870HN 51D to an external syslog server P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 93 Firmware Specifications continued Universal Plug and A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an Play UPnP IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network QoS Quality of You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving Service bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTPS or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the P 870HN 51D PPPoE Support
167. ck Status gt VDSL Statistics to open the following screen Use this screen to check VDSL status and detailed performance data Figure 24 Status gt VDSL Statistics xDSL Statistics VDSL Training Status Idle VDSL Profile 0 Traffic Type Inactive VDSL Port Details Upstream Downstream Line Rate 0 000 Mbps 0 000 Mbps Actual Net Data Rate 0 000 Mbps 0 000 Mbps Trellis Coding N a N a SNR Margin 0 0 daB 0 0 daB Actual Delay 0 ms 0 ms Transmit Power 0 0 dBm 0 0 dBm Receive Power 0 0 dBm 0 0 dBm Actual INP 0 0 symbols 0 0 symbols Total Attenuation 0 0 daB 0 0 dB Attainable Net Data Rate 0 000 Mbps 0 000 Mbps VDSL Band Status uo UL U2 U3 D1 D2 D3 Line Attenuation dB N A N a N a N a N A N A N A Signal Attenuation dB N A N A N A N A N A N A N A SNR Margin dB N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Transmit Power dBm N A N A N A N A N A N A N A ee VDSL Counters Downstream Upstream Since Link time 0 sec FEC 0 o CRC oO oO ES 0 0 SES 0 m UAS 10354 a LOS o o LOF Oo a Latest 15 minutes time 5 sec Refre nterval Wy T et Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status gt VDSL Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION VDSL Training This shows whether the DSL port is connected Showtime idle Idle Status not connected is negotiating a connection with a COE device G 994 Training is under loop test RUN_LD_INIT or under channel analysis G 922 Channel
168. cluding without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS ORIMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE This Product includes OpenSSL v0 9 7f under the OpenSSL License OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met P 870HN 51D User s Guide 361 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the d
169. cut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Figure 144 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced _ Connect using ES Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items M E Client for Microsoft Networks v 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected P 870HN 51D User s Guide 271 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Figure 145 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 6 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamical
170. d decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Mask TCP UDP Port If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check Range box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask Mask TCP UDP Port If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check Range box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Othe
171. d e0 Tcp x Add A Name Start Port End Port Start Port End Port Address Apply Cancel meal Lig User Define P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Configure the screen as follows to open TCP UDP port 53 for Xbox 360 Click Apply Rule Setup IM active Service Name fkoox360 WAN Interface fipoe_0_01_tiptmo_1 gt External Start Port BE External End Port fs Internal Start Port fs Internel End Port fs sd Server IP Address fiszies134 Protocol TCP E Back Apply Cancel 3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to open the rest of the ports for Xbox 360 Use a different service name for each port you want to add The port forwarding settings you configured are listed in the Port Forwarding screen Default Server Setup Default Server 0 0 0 0 Port Forwarding aa Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Add Xbox 360 Xbox 360 192 192 168 1 Xbox 360 Xbox 360 192 168 1 Thomas can then connect his Xbox 360 to the Internet and play online games with his friends 2 5 Access the P 870HN 51D Using DDNS If you connect your P 870HN 51D to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The P P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 870HN 51D s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the P 870HN 51D using a domain name http zyx
172. d to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned Connld This shows the index number of each connection This displays N A when the interface used by the connection is in Default Mode IGMP This shows whether IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is activated or not for this connection IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this interface NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Firewall This shows whether the firewall is activated or not for this connection The firewall is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection Click the Remove icon to delete the WAN connection Add Click Add to create a new connection 5 5 1 WAN Connection Configuration Click the Edit or Add button in the WAN Service screen to configure a WAN connection 5 5 1 1 WAN Interface This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection Figure 31 WAN Configuration WAN Interface WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service ptmo 0_0_1 Back Next P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 WAN Configuration WAN Interface
173. e the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 4 The Layer 2 Interface Screen The P 870HN 51D must have a layer 2 interface to allow users to use the DSL port to access the Internet Figure 28 Layer 2 Interface DSL PTM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to configure DSL PTM interfaces ES ptmo MultipleServiceMode Enabled Wi Add The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 12 Layer 2 Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This is the name of the interface Connection Mode This displays the connection mode of the layer 2 interface Qos This displays whether QoS Quality of Service is enabled on the P 870HN 51D Remove Click the Remove button to delete this interface from the P 870HN 51D A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the interface Note You cannot remove the layer 2 interface when a WAN service is associated with
174. e DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack You can have up to seven WAN services over one VDSL WAN line P 870HN 51D User s Guide a Chapter 1 Introducing the P 870HN 51D Computers can connect to the P 870HN 51D s LAN ports or wirelessly Figure 1 P 870HN 51D s Internet Access Application WAN Bridgi eee PPPoE gt You can also configure the firewall on the P 870HN 51D for secure Internet access When the firewall is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files 1 3 Ways to Manage the P 870HN 51D Use any of the following methods to manage the P 870HN 51D e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the P 870HN 51D using a Supported web browser e TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the P 870HN 51D Do the following things regularly to make the P 870HN 51D more secure and to manage the P 870HN 51D more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place 22 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing
175. e Rolle SNS soria E a ORA 163 lazi Policy Forwanding WE sadist prusssasinciaina pissed agendas iaaxvealhnatnrsensasomnldeetaiganineianans 164 Chapter 13 BRM E ENE EE E sins ge slg EEE ss Tam ecw meso csc mt acs E ois E ensue ve cen aaa aaa Saco EE ee 167 WW RN enan dat atesceszce hc ceactaites eer nce a acede te ed ioaee eideke tence 167 18 1 1 What You Can De tint this Chaple xcccs ccc cceaccecansecaicoasneds scecmrenedstaammmeisicnantededantaennesaig 167 13 2 The RIP SGre ccancasccscancnsuctanssusitun chaliauusandaonspoineinaavaxiand ennwsSusansauesaneaanakassebeaaduadaunadnbedan onan 167 Chapter 14 O aliv ot Savice QOS aiii aisats a a 169 AN A AB EY aici 5cse 3 das cconttoeidss daampediedadee paadenmnepaiaatdaaeanal EE 169 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Table of Contents 141 1 What You Gan Do in tis Chapter ccieccissssscassdaaumeseaaiesaananaaianeiaassatiinanned 169 14 2 What You Need O ics sees a sus sueice ss ius cecaninu suet eain iaai Nae ASEE Na AOAR iS 170 14 3 The Quality of Service General Screens cecccecisccisceiestonetsheeds acceenidesssatieedeennniedt cndsonneenees 170 TARAS The SU Saup SNEEN sik casera assests opera eae ae ads N 172 MaA lAng a Vos MOUSE 5s rs nc cee rca vanes tecoregne N 173 14S The Linse SU NN eiai aer ieina a E AEAT AENEAN 174 IE EREE AE E a E E E A E E T OEE NEA TEN 176 146 Ihe Policor Saup Screen porondon a Rai 180 TEGI Palce Saup ADVE uriia ore ee ener rr er ererTre rere reer rrr cere rere rere tee
176. e WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your P 870HN 51D WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS P 870HN 51D User s Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS The following screen displays Figure 53 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS WPS Setup M Enable WPS PIN Number q Note WPS Status WPS Status 802 11 Mode SSID Security Key 1 This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode is configured 2 The Auto Generate Key would be disabled when user release configuration 88320564 Generate Configured Release_Configuration 802 11b 9 n ZyXEL Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK 12345678 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the P 870HN 51D PIN Number This shows the PIN Personal Identification Number of the P 870HN 51D Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Generate Click this button to have the P 870HN 51D create a new PIN WPS Status This displays Configured when the P 870HN
177. e following screen Use this screen to configure your P 870HN 51D to be managed by an ACS Figure 96 TR 069 TRO69 TRO69 Inform ACS URL ACS Password Inform Interval ACS User Name WAN Interface used by TR 069 client Any WAN Display SOAP messages on serial console Disable Enable V Connection Request Authentication ConnectionRequest User Name ConnectionRequest Password Connection Request URL Disable Enable 300 sec Min 30 sec m bain pee n admin pee o PT Apply Save Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 71 TR 069 LABEL DESCRIPTION Inform Select Enable to activate remote management via TR 069 on the WAN Otherwise select Disable Inform Interval Enter the time interval in seconds at which the P 870HN 51D sends information to the auto configuration server ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto configuration server ACS User Name Enter the TR 069 user name for authentication with the auto configuration server ACS Password Enter the TR 069 password for authentication with the auto configuration server WAN Interface used by TR 069 client Select a WAN interface through which the TR 069 traffic passes If you select Multi_WAN you should also select the pre configured WAN connection s Display SOAP messages on serial console Select Enable to show the SOAP messages
178. e in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification Basic From Interface Select from which Ethernet port or wireless interface traffic of this class should come P 870HN 51D User s Guide 177 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 178 Table 64 QoS Class Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select IP you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 8021Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section Source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotte
179. e of the user MAC This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this schedule applies Mon Sun x indicates the day s on which parental control is enabled Start This shows the time when the schedule starts Stop This shows the time when the schedule ends Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the schedule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing schedule Add Click Add to create a new schedule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D 18 2 1 Adding a Schedule Click the Add button in the Time Restriction screen to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user on your network Figure 117 Time Restriction Configuration Add Access Time Restriction This page adds time of day restriction to a special LAN device connected to the Router To restrict the LAN device enter the MAC address of the LAN device To find out the MAC address of a Windows based PC go to command window and type ipconfig fall User Name MAC Address Days ofthe week on tue wed frhu feri Jet Click to select Start Blocking Time hh mm End Blocking Time hh mm Back Save Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 18 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 78 Time Restriction Configuration LABEL DESC
180. e on the P 870HN 51D DSL 10 000 kbps a A x TER N EJ Your computer IP 192 168 1 23 and or MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF Email traffic Highest priority A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Click Advanced gt QoS gt General and check Active Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10 000 kbps or leave this blank to have the P 870HN 51D automatically determine this figure General IV Enable QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth 19000 kbps LAN WLAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth kbps You can assign the managed bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically Upstream traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None 7 Apply Cancel Go to Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup Click Add to create a new queue In the screen that opens check Active and enter or select the following values e Name E mail Interface LAN WLAN Priority 4 High e Weight 8 e Rate Limit 5 000 kbps Queue Configuration IV Enable Name E Mail Interface LANMVLAN z Priority a Weight 8 7 Buffer p Management Drop Tail OT Rate Limit 5000 kbps Back Apply Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Goto Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Click Add to create a new class Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the scre
181. e sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the P 870HN 51D queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the P 870HN 51D periodically updates this information DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The P 870HN 51D can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the P 870HN 51D s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS serve
182. e wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood 322 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS I Dentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 204 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet Sannoo Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a P 870HN 51D User s Guide 323 Appendix E Wireless LANs hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point
183. e you may use to access the P 870HN 51D LAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the P 870HN 51D from the LAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the P 870HN 51D from the WAN Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 16 Remote Management 16 5 The IP Address Screen Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt IP Address to open the following screen Use this screen to specify the trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the P 870HN 51D Figure 99 IP Address IPAddress Access Control IP Address The IP Address Access Control mode if enabled permits access to local management services from IP addresses contained in the Access Control List If the Access Control mode is disabled the system will not validate IP addresses for incoming packets The services are the system applications listed in the Service Control List Access Control Mode Disable Enable lip Address Removo 192 168 1 33 Oo Ada Remove The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Control Select Enable to activate the secured client list Select Disable to Mode disable the list without deleting it
184. eate an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 870HN 51D User s Guide 31 7 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 199 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example 4 i 4 iA i I 1 I I I y 1 192 168 1 33 I I I BE I 192 168 1 33 Qauannnannanm ee Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnet
185. econds the data requires to make the roundtrip journey from your computer to the destination host and back again The lower the number the faster the connection between the two points Note Some hosts are deliberately configured to not respond to ping requests As such we suggest pinging two or three hosts when performing your ping test P 870HN 51D User s Guide 257 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting If your ping test fails to get a response then you may see a message like this C gt ping www example com Pinging www example com 192 0 32 10 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 0 32 10 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss C gt When a request times out it may mean your computer is not connected to the network e your Internet access device is not connected to the network e or the device which you are pinging is not connected to the network If you think the destination is active but responding slowly you can try increasing the ping timeout value from its default of 4 seconds 4000 milliseconds to something like 8 seconds or 8000 milliseconds C gt ping w 8000 www example com Pinging www example com 192 0 32 10 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 157ms TTL 238 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 154ms TTL 238 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 15
186. ed networks a Properties 2 OK Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide 275 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP 1Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 152 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties 8 E General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 5 Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically i Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced cancel _ 8 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 276 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix
187. ed that you give each certificate a unique name In Use This field displays how many applications use the certificate Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate Send a certification request to a certification authority which then issues a certificate Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the request signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority Action Click the View button to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Load Signed button to import a valid certification to replace the request Click the Remove button to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate Table 47 Local Certificates continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Create Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the P 870HN Certificate 51D generate a certification request Request
188. ed to as wireless client here P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials We use the P 870HN 51D web screens and M 302 utility screens as an example The screens may vary slightly for different models 2 2 2 Configuring the AP 1 Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP Open the Network gt Wireless LAN screen in the AP s web configurator Figure 3 AP Wireless LAN Wireless Setup V Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto 7 Current 6 Bandwidth 20MHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 I Auto Generate Key 7 Hide Network Name SSID BSSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C Security Mode WPA PSK x Encryption TKIP 7 Pre Shared Key Thisismy AP A PSKpre she Group Key Update Timer 0 sec ReKey Method NONE 7 q Note ReKey Method means encryption keys are automatically changed after specified by 1 TIME period of time 1 seconds 2 None Disable Rekey Method MAC Filter Edit Apply Reset Make sure the Active Wireless LAN check box is selected Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select Auto to have the P 870HN 51D automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 5 Click the Advanced Setup tab and select 802 11b g n Mixed in the 802
189. een lets you view and configure the WAN settings on the P 870HN 51D for Internet access Section 5 5 on page 73 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 11 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION CONNECTION WAN SERVICE INTERFACE MODE TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS Default Mode PPP user name and password WAN IP address VLAN MUX DNS server and default Mode gateway MSC Mode PoE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridging N A 5 2 What You Need to Know Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the P 870HN 51D which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the P 870HN 51D to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the P 870HN 51D tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you us
190. een resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display P 870HN 51D User s Guide 277 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings Figure 155 Windows 7 Network And Sharing Center G SE Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v 4 Search Control Panel Home 2 4 a 3 View your basic network information and set up connections Manage wireless networks fi See full map i a Jo Change adapter settings F TW PC ZyXEL com Internet Change advanced sharing This computer settings i A 98 View your active networks Connect or disconnect ZyXEL com Access type Internet Work network Connections Local Area Connection 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 156 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Status GO gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this Local Area Connection Buu Wireless Network Connection Unidentified network ee ZyXEL RT 1 4 MI Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ill 802 11n USB Adapter a eel a 7 ae tir Pres i ote A 4 Local Area Connection Status x General Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivit
191. elect an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the P 870HN 51D Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 7 9 4 WiFi Protected Setup Your P 870HN 51D supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works P 870HN 51D User s Guide 121 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves 7 9 4 1 Push Button Co
192. elrouter dyndns org gt u INTERNEJ L Ja WXYZ a b c d To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org This tutorial shows you how to e Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org e Configuring DDNS on Your P 870HN 51D e Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS 2 5 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org 1 Open a browser and type http www dyndns org 2 Apply for a user account This tutorial uses UserNamel1 and 12345 as the username and password 3 Log into www dyndns org using your account 4 Add anew DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example e Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org e Service Type Host with IP address e IP Address Enter the WAN IP address that your P 870HN 51D is currently using You can find the IP address on the P 870HN 51D s Web Configurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the P 870HN 51D later 2 5 2 Configuring DDNS on Your P 870HN 51D 1 Log into the P 870HN 51D s advanced mode P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Configure the following settings in the Advanced gt Dynamic DNS screen 2a Select WWW DynDNS ORG for the Service Provider 2b Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field 2c Select interface for which the DDNS applies 2d Enter the user name UserNamel1 and passw
193. en Use this screen to create a new interface group Note An interface can belong to a group only Figure 122 Interface Group Configuration General Group Name WAN Interface WAN Interface used in the grouping ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_1 LAN Interface Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Criteria Automatically Add Clients With the following Criteria Add Back Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 82 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group WAN Interfaces Select a WAN interface to be used in this group used in the grouping Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group Grouped LAN Select a LAN or wireless LAN interface in the Available LAN Interfaces Interfaces and use the left facing arrow to move it to the Grouped LAN Interfaces to add the interface to this group Available LAN Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces use the righ facing arrow This shows the index number of the rule Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically P 870HN 51D User s Guide 215 Chapter 19 Interface Group Table 82 Interface Group Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Remove
194. en before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out di
195. en below Class Configuration IV Enable Class Name Criteria Configuration Basic V From Interface V Ether Type Source V MAC Address V IP Address Destination I MAC Address I IP Address E mail Classification Order Last v ie tnchenge z DSCP Mark unchange L 0 63 802 1P Mark unchange VLAN ID Tag unchange gt m 1 4094 To Queue E Mail gt Local v IP 0x800 x AAFP AAFP AAFF mad Mask fi 92 168 1 23 B lS ti i lt DD ubnet Mask r F TCP UDP Port Range a E MAC Mask E IP Subnet Mask E 7 TCP UDP Port Range E Others m 802 1P z E VLAN ID 409 E I IP Packet Length E m psep __ 0x63 E I TCP ack E I DHCP Vendor Class D HCP Option 60 z i q Note Support DHCP options only when routing mode Back Apply Cancel Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Exclude Class Name this example Give a class name to this traffic such as E mail in To Queue created in this example Link this to an item in the Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup screen which is the E mail queue From Interface coming from Select Local This is the interface from which the traffic will be Ether Type address or MAC address Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tuto
196. entifies a service Port Open End Port This is the last open port number that identifies a service Open Proto This is the open transport layer protocol 1 means TCP 2 means UDP and 3 means TCP UDP Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent P 870HN 51D User s Guide rules move up by one when you take this action Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 39 NAT Trigger Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 8 4 1 Trigger Port Configuration This screen lets you create new port triggering rules Click the Add icon in the NAT Trigger Port screen to open the following screen Figure 66 NAT gt Trigger Port gt Add Rule Setup M active Service Name Aim Talk WAN Interface fipoe_0_0_4_1iptmo_1 Trigger Start Port fi Trigger End Port fi ooo Trigger Protocol TCP F Open Start Port kos tits Open End Port kos tits Open Protocol TCP T Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 NAT gt Port Triggering gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule
197. entio mS ne ee ay 5 OU NANNY ass echt ee ade racecar Ea Eiaa a a a cetalen tins 7 ey ge 2 eee eo ne ee ee eer ee eee ee 9 Tabip of 211 See ee ee eee a ae eee ene are eee eer 11 Part l User Br eee 19 Chapter 1 introducing the P 970HN 51D scasissassaransnrsainnnnsianensnatansesnnsdsnnsnananseandsaniassanaeanmsianentaaiananensions 21 TI Ric iL orriaren renee tree errr peer y reo tecrtrye errr Tree remrr rrr nr erry 21 1 2 Poe URINE ST ior Intemel ACCESS horian 21 1 2 Ways to Manage the P S 0HN 5TD snsnsnniiimna a 22 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the P 870HN 51D so coesiisscsasticcaetincesncesavasasssdeavseienenndsvndennass 22 yee cl ay LIOME ee eerie rere eens eee errr eee eet ee ere er rere 23 Le The RESET Bin siiessaitiiwiieeni manda eeli aie nani aR 25 aay ISIE Tie Geet EURON oarra naan 25 t TA Binds soc cek cxscicicedenabiemanandaieiencapcaecciusegasnncnisaddues cabeeabc cuenegasntcmnienuasunteaddatecameticecey 25 ket TE Te Wiroess LR CAT TOIT cs sass tusisesasreisesserdsideedlaanisecansandedxieatuuaitddanabduessamiads 25 Tide PICS VIPS siccinassccieanasse taasanhebs N 25 Chapter 2 rir 27 POVON ON aperon ena Geni aia eR ENTE 27 2 2 How to Setup a Wireless NetWork si ccesassncceusacceieadi viagintaaerdasns ooeiacedenesiacadcenaqaiidereenanangarenians 27 Zai Example FParamelors crenisnieia aa Gat 27 Tae CONOUG NE AP rouan a err emer ee mnt tr ronrrr 28 222 Conigurnng the Wireless Cheni soarmeraramiacerenn n A AA 30 2 3 Configuring the MA
198. ents can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server Update Timer sends a new group key out to all clients P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 28 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION ReKey Method Select Time to change encryption keys automatically using the time interval specified in the Group Key Update Timer field If no value is entered in the said field this feature is disabled Select None if you do not want to use this feature Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the P 870HN 51D The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your P 870HN 51D The key is not sent over the network 7 4 5 MAC Filter This screen allows you to configure the P 870HN 51D to give exclusive access to specific devices Allow or exclude specific devices from accessin
199. ents without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support_warranty_ info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index A ACS 191 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 331 ALG 138 alternative subnet mask notation 312 antenna 247 directional 336 gain 335 omni directional 336 AP access point 323 Application Layer Gateway 138
200. erationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the P 870HN 51D rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the P 870HN 51D does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have access IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Full Cone NAT In full cone NAT the NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network The NAT router also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port In the following example the P 870HN 51D maps the source address of all packets sent from the internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network The P 870HN 51D also performs NAT on all incoming P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup packets sent to IP address 2 and port B and forwards them to IP address 1 port A Figure 39 Full Cone NAT
201. erence to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication IMPORTANT NOTE Device for the band 5150 5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co channel mobile satellite systems users should also be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users meaning they have priority of the bands 5250 5350 MHz and 5650 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and or damage to LE LAN devices IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance ite N P A WIR ESTAS PCH SBR RAS RR JERRTE gt ZR ARKE ATS tel A BS ES gt ADRK a PERE BT TUR BARAER BE MLE A Ss RAR APES gt MENTE gt ie 8 BSE 0 ee BEE o ANARE THR RL BLE ESE ZAR ET o RDS BEAR MAER SS PES eee FYB ST E E TE
202. erver or DHCP relay agent Otherwise deselect this to not have the P 870HN 51D provide any DHCP services The DHCP server will be disabled DHCP Server Select this option to have the P 870HN 51D assign IP addresses and provide subnet mask gateway and DNS server information to the network The P 870HN 51D is the DHCP server for the network When the P 870HN 51D acts as a DHCP server the following items need to be set IP Pool This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP Starting address pool Address Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DHCP Relay Select this option to have the P 870HN 51D forward DHCP request to the DHCP server Relay Server If you select DHCP Relay enter the IP address of the DHCP server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface When a LAN client sends a DNS query to the P 870HN 51D the P 870HN 51D forwards the query to the system DNS server configured in the WAN interface you select If you do not configure DNS servers on the selected WAN inteface the P 870HN 51D uses the LAN IP address and tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that itself is the DNS server Use the following Static DNS IP address First DNS Enter the first DNS Domain Name System server IP address the P Server 870HN 51D passes to the DHCP clients Second DNS Enter the second DNS Domain Name System se
203. es a0 System Preferences Personal Ee Bo eA B BB Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp International Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware gt p E V V ws A CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp N a a Mac QuickTime Sharing System G a u Q 2 OO OQ Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Figure 168 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet 000 Network Location Automatic HJ 3 A e Internal Modem Q Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but o PPPoE ooe your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet ZN fick iera lt Configure Using DHCP ie FireWire Not Connected e AirPort Off DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 A rr Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet ma
204. es the labels in this screen Table 63 QoS Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new classifier Order This field displays the index number of the classifier Active Select the check box to enable the classifier Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface Criteria from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide 175 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 14 5 1 QoS Class Edit Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a classifier Figure 91
205. ess 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 105 Eight Subnets suoner SUBNET runs aponess 4ASieg BROADSAST 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 315 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 106 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ORS OED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 4 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 107 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning
206. ess tab Figure 182 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup YaST2 linux h20z Address Setup Al a Network Card Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is configuration Name particularly useful for anneme ile bonding ethernet devices _ No IP Address for Bonding Devices General Select Dynamic _ Dynamic Address DHCP address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider Statically assigned IP Address You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use iy 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the
207. ets prior to the normal routing You can use source based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing 12 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the P 870HN 51D Section 12 2 on page 163 12 2 The Static Route Screen Click Advanced gt Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen Figure 84 Advanced gt Policy Forwarding Policy Forwarding maximum 8 entries can be configured Se Be Protocol sourceport SourceMac WAN i 23 test 192 168 1 99 TCP ptmo_i i Add P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced gt Policy Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name This is the name of the rule Sourcel P This is the source IP address Protocol This is the transport layer protocol SourcePort This is the source port number SourceMAC This is the source MAC address Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Remove Click the icon to remove a rule from the P 870HN 51D A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the rule Add Click this to create a new rule 12 2 1 Policy Forwarding Setup Click the Add button in the Policy Forwardi
208. ettings screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 176 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt DNS Fs Network Settings Be Location s E Connections General DNS Hosts DNS Servers pease badd Search Domains Help EJ close 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System gt Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 177 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Devices Network ooe n n Pay x Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger Whois RAEN ST os 9 configure IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 e16c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c eeeeytes 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0
209. evious screen Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Figure 14 ZyXEL Utility Profile Encryption Security Settings gt Encryption Type reir 7 gt Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next Exit 6 Inthe next screen leave both boxes checked Figure 15 Profile Wireless Protocol Settings Wireless Protocol Settings V 802 11b V 802 11g Back Next Exit P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Verify the profile settings in the read only screen Click Save to save and go to the next screen Figure 16 Profile Confirm Save onfirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit 8 Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately Otherwise click the Activate Later button If you clicked Activate Later you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it Note Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time Figure 17 Profile Activate Your network has been configured successfully Activate Now Activate Later 9 When you activate the new profile the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon
210. f and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help fa FCC Radiation Exposure Statement e This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e EEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 e To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix H Legal Information This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interf
211. field above Internal Start Enter the port number here to which you want the P 870HN 51D to Port translate the incoming port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Internal End Enter the last port of the translated port range Port Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 The Trigger Port Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The P 870HN 51D records the IP address of a
212. fields in this screen Table 86 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Select a severity level of logs to view The P 870HN 51D displays the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Date Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Severity This field displays the severity level of the log System This field displays the system module from which the logs come Message This field states the reason for the log 21 3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the P 870HN 51D is to send logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the P 870HN 51D is to record and display P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs To change your P 870HN 51D s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings The screen appears as shown Figure 127 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings Syslog Logging T Enable Log Level Mode Log Settings If the log mode is enabled the system will begin to log all the selected events For the Log Level all events above or equal to the selected level will be logged If the selected mode is Remote or Both events will be sent to the specified IP address and UDP port of the remote syslog server If the selected mode is Local or Both events will be recorded
213. figure a new profile Figure 11 ZyXEL Utility Profile Profit Tat E Profile Name Network Type Infrastructure p DEFAULT Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security DISABLE Connect Add Delete Edit 2 The Add New Profile screen appears The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks which are displayed in the Scan Info box Click on Scan if you want to search again You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list Figure 12 ZyXEL Utility Add New Profile Add New Profile Scan Info gt Profile Name PN_Example3 SSID a al gt SSID 551D_Example3 T CPE_5257_00 T CPE_5548_AP gt Network Type T ox SSID_Example3 Infrastructure Connect to an Access point T aid zyxel C Ad Hoc Connect directly to other computers T ZyXEL xl Scan Select Next Exit 3 Give the profile a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Select I nfrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP s SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select P 870HN 51D User s Guide E Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect In this example WPA PSK Figure 13 ZyXEL Utility Profile Security Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK 7 i Back i Next i Exit 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the pr
214. filter to allow or block access to the P 870HN 51D based on the MAC addresses of the wireless stations e The More AP screen lets you set up multiple wireless networks on your P 870HN 51D Section 7 5 on page 112 e Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup WPS WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly when connecting to other WPS enabled devices Use the WPS screen see Section 7 6 on page 113 to enable or disable WPS generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number and see information about the P 870HN 51D s WPS status Use the WPS Station see Section 7 7 on page 115 screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e The Advanced Setup screen lets you change the wireless mode and make other advanced wireless configuration changes Section 7 8 on page 116 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen 7 2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices exchange information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with r
215. for the specified service External Port Start Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External Port End field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External Port End field External Port End Enter the last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Port Start field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above Internal Port Start Enter the port number to which you want the P 870HN 51D to translate the incoming port To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Internal Port End field For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Internal Port End Enter the last port of the translated port range Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below No This is the rule index number read only Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packe
216. from the device and the power source e Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord e Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s e If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE Key stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical ps and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately P 870HN 51D User s Guide Safety Warnings P 870HN 51D User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Uoer NET fs gr eee ees ee ORE ere oeo aro a yee DEE ant rae me nee care 19 Intodueing the P B7ORINS10 occ cisasasinaanuenmese Gea 21 WNIT BANS canara E T sux gues da dauasuud aim A N E T A T EE T A ITEE 27 LAER Ur Me Web OTRO uconirosiismiuaii n nea aa aaie 47 Technical Referente cicessisesccsssiensasintasscsiasaniarserda
217. g Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list Forward to Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out If you select Unchange the P 870HN 51D forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the P 870HN 51D replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Auto Mapping and there is a VLAN tag carried in the matched packets the P 870HN 51D will replace the IP ToS field with the 802 1p priority field If you select Unchange the P 870HN 51D keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1p Mark Select a priority level with which the P 870HN 51D replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the P 870HN 51D keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets VLAN ID Tag If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 with which the P 870HN 51D replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the P 870HN 51D deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the P 870HN 51D treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the P 870HN 51D keep the VLAN ID in the packets To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queu
218. g the P 870HN 51D Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen Use this screen to change your P 870HN 51D s MAC filter settings Click the Edit button in the Wireless LAN gt General screen The following screen displays Figure 49 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter MAC Filter MAC Restrict Mode pt Pac address Remove Disabled Allow Deny Back Add P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Restrict Mode Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the table below Select Disabled to turn off MAC address filtering Select Allow to permit access to the P 870HN 51D MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the P 870HN 51D Select Deny to block access to the P 870HN 51D MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the P 870HN 51D This is the index number of the MAC address MAC This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied Address access to the P 870HN 51D Modify Click the Remove icon to delete the entry Back Click this to return to
219. ges CCMs are sent and if there is any invalid CCM or cross connect CCM Loopback Message LBM This shows how many Loop Back Messages LBMs are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response LBR received from a remote MEP Linktrace Message LTM This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response LTR Save Click this to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Enable CCM Click this button to have the selected MEP send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs to other MEPs Disable CCM Click this button to disallow the selected MEP to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs to other MEPs Update CC status Click this button to reload the test result Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM Loop Back Message to a specified remote end point Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs Link Trace Messages to a specified remote end point P 870HN 51D User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e P 870HN 51D Access and Login e Internet Access e Wireless LAN Troubleshooting 24 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The P 870HN 51D does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the P 870HN
220. hanges to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 5 The DMZ Host Screen In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen Figure 67 NAT gt DMZ Host DMZ Host Default Server 192 168 1 q Note Enter IP address and click Apply to activate the DMZ host Clear the IP address field and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 41 NAT gt DMZ Host LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server the P 870HN 51D discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 37 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT 8 6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream The SIP ALG translates the P 870HN 51D s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address
221. hapter 10 Certificate P 870HN 51D User s Guide Static Route 11 1 Overview The P 870HN 51D usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the P 870HN 51D send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the P 870HN 51D s LAN interface The P 870HN 51D routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the P 870HN 51D s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 81 Example of Static Routing Topology 11 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Static Route screens let you view and configure IP static routes on the P 870HN 51D Section 11 2 on page 160 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Route 11 2 The Static Route Screen Click Advanced gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen Figure 82 Advanced gt Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Rules Active Destination Netinaak Gatonay taterface_ Remove 1 Ww V 10 1 23 255 255 255 255 ppp _1 Add Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Advanced gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This
222. hapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 9 2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the P 870HN 51D s Web Configurator Table 35 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the P 870HN 51D The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the P 870HN 51D Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the P 870HN 51D does it cannot communicate with the P 870HN 51D Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks Threshold while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 7 9 3 Wireless Security Overview The following
223. his is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol MULTI CAST is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix F Common Services Table 112 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point T
224. his screen Table 49 Import Local Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Type up to 31 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this Name certificate Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 870HN 51D Private Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the P 870HN Key 51D Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate 10 3 3 Certificate Details Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates to open the My Certificates screen see Figure 72 on page 148 Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen Use this screen to view in depth certificate information and change the certificate s name Figure 76 Certificate Details Certificate Details Name example Type request Subject CN example_1 O example_2 ST OK C US Certificate null 73 Private Key NIICXQIBAAKBgQDOzV5S2 T qTiyJDQ6CQVLPFS5QuPh3 DeiVoUTeb2 9dMSRACnSCiO tB2f NyGKUxpareujTgjz5Z2wSPIVO4o07i Hie1lqFHPQOyrrGOusMXGGSNZGTLEPEk RuRCil6onNICpRMAdcwGTLYZazwYosSGuUBlizcj ZXXOYxuCK7UF apMFpRwIDAQaB AOGBAMOP 6vbdadGyXRohIHStP2NZcDtfh2xL69FsEytid bx7NhLbwDOZ L7D7uqds 4h 2iCoDRnYUgGRPBINOnYxPoGsstCcocaln3 qi3 d2nrEiPKbbLAxxZz0GJZcE1JidE minEg4fM2 InMr72ezqgWURNF4COxyP yOSS UbGp
225. his to save the setting to the P 870HN 51D 17 4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 102 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Add Remove Programs Properties 21x Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add or remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components M GA Address Book amp Communications 5 6 MB C RY Desktop Themes 0 0 MB M i Games 10 1 MB O E Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Inthe Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box Figure 103 Add Remove Programs Windows Setu
226. hown Figure 55 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Wireless Advanced Setup 802 11 Mode 802 11 biqin Mixed w RTS CTS Threshold paz Fragmentation Threshold s5 Number of Wireless Stations Allowed is Output Power 100 802 11 Protection for x Preamble Long Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to only allow IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 870HN 51D Select 802 11g Only to allow IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 870HN 51D IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices can associate with the P 870HN 51D only when they use the short premble type Select 802 11n Only to only allow IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 870HN 51D This can increase transmission rates although IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g clients will not be able to connect to the P 870HN 51D Select 802 11b g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 870HN 51D The P 870HN 51D adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices Select 802 11 b g n mixed mode to allow both EEE802 11b EEE802 11g and EEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 870HN 51D The transmission rate of your P 870HN 51D
227. icates and certification requests Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs Advanced Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes Policy Use this screen to configure policy routing on the P 870HN 51D Forwarding RIP Use this screen to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol settings Qos General Use this screen to enable QoS Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier Policer Setup Use this screen to specify the committed rate and committed burst size for incoming packets Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics Dynamic DNS This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Remote TRO69 Use this screen to configure the P 870HN 51D to be managed by MGMT an ACS Auto Configuration Server TRO64 Use this screen to enable management via TR 064 on the LAN ServiceControl Use this screen to configure which services protocols can access which P 870HN 51D interface IP Address Use this screen to configure from which IP address es users can manage the P 870HN 51D UPnP General Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off Parental Time Use this screen to configure the days and times when the Control Restriction restrictions are
228. ices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The UPnP screen lets you enable UPnP on the P 870HN 51D Section 17 3 on page 198 17 2 What You Need to Know How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a Separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings P 870HN 51D User s Guide 197 Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be
229. ick Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 190 Internet Options Security AE General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites f This zone contains all Web sites you Gree haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone 3 Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 870HN 51D User s Guide 303 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window
230. if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults P 870HN 51D User s Guide 125 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 9 4 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 59 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR p a lt Q Q SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in
231. igure 137 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools P 870HN 51D User s Guide 23 1 23 1 1 Diagnostic Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the P 870HN 51D The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber s network access In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts IEEE 802 1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management CFM specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults Through discovery and verification of the path CFM can detect analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host Section 23 3 on page 236 e The 802 1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions Section 23 4 on page 237 23 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter How CFM Works A Maintenance Association MA defines
232. inasina aa lade TE enapE 121 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT c seecseesseeseeeeseeseeeseeeseenneesneesneeseeesneesnenneneneneeneees 129 BARS aca cat taste dete ceeaucace tau ee autem aaa cee anaenieaas tema na ce mae tice te ae a 129 8 11 What You Can Da inthis CHa piel snccisans canter ennaidintdiaiouetasumi ion 129 o2 Vent ToU NESO TO RMON oroia a isr S Naa E bed 129 8 3 The Port Forwarding BOGET assis cee sacemdocctsiedivaactouta Saadeh aiara a eae 130 8 391 The Pon Forwarding Edit SCEE sinini rondina AAAA 132 eA The moga Pon SFR ON caoine tarethrcopaee cen oadangeenscincaae au savailaotespeeiaeaet melee annals 133 Bal Moger PORT QURAN jcc cccccaneesasdrctiebe leasieeceddceasine fassvacnnee sate a Eara 136 g5 Te ER SO OE enian aoia EESE ANA aa aaa EE AAE Ea 137 0 The ALG STEEN sincan aa i 138 87 Techical Pete re ee sororia ani E RAE 138 Chapter 9 PrE ia scceanrccaavarnarsnivariysateanatsusaapucyagseimsanbal nelaunatnanecusaseysabanaaayctanvassans eansaytaviuvaasubyanasauvaebeanes 141 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 13 Table of Contents NN fa rete cna Neopet eta a ec ate eaten 141 Sh What You Cani Do BS COATT seas conus auasinddeibseai elon andshadavesncprnssl deaadiidentatemieibamasres 141 9 2 What rou Need Tee MOR sciri nies cectesdeets cutenaney cubes rE teuaetearts ceed 141 De Debord a fests eo Eee lt 1 ROP aae en ee Pa Oe en i Raver OR RP See ey OR er Tn nee POOREST aE 142 93 1 Creating Incom
233. indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded e br indicates the LAN interface e ptm indicates the VDSL WAN interface using PoE or in bridge mode pppoal indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PPPoA e ipoa0 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoA e pppo indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE e eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface using PoE 4 2 3 WLAN Station List Click Status gt WLAN Station List to access this screen Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the P 870HN 51D Figure 23 Status gt WLAN Station List WLAN Station List Refresh Interval fs s c Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status gt WLAN Station List LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC This field shows the MAC Media Access Control address of an associated wireless station SSID This field shows the SSID to which the wireless station is connected Interface This field shows the wireless interface to which the wireless station is connected Refresh Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 4 VDSL Statistics Cli
234. indows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix example com TP AGAVSS Sst ol Mo te de eae BAe Ge CEOD DL 6B ed SUbNeE Maske r vt ae ee oe eo A AP EOD 255 25510 Default Gateway 1 1 1 4 CENS P 870HN 51D User s Guide 255 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Here you can see that the device has IP address of 1 1 1 1 and example com is its Domain Name Server DNS If the device is disconnected then you would see the following instead Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Media State Media disconnected If the device is connected but cannot get an IP address then you would see Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway oo oo oo oo In some cases your computer may be properly connected to the network or the P 870HN 51D but it is not receiving an IP address for whatever reason Use the release parameter followed by renew C gt ipconfig release Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address 00s 00 Subnet Mask 000 0 Default Gateway C gt ipconfig renew Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix zyxel com TP AOGGSS So ede an e m on us ae a a Se POD LO GaL 2 Subnet Mask ae
235. ing Firewall FUles cscs cssencceadecenestasdeants vesasess wneiuataetoueniedesumncennenias 144 Chapter 10 CORO a a A A 147 ROT T EAE E E A PEE AEAEE EEEE A T E A EEE E ee ere E E ae 147 101 1 What You Can Do i this Chapter sosisisnsisnisinisneni nnno iaa 147 102 What You Need 10 KNOW siminn e a 147 10 3 The Local Gertificates Sereen srrnrsmisrinenaia a E N E 148 10 8 1 Greate Caenilicaie Reguesi seiusmicniioerne nimeer e a ia aE Saai 149 TS impot CENENE oae a Staaten eae 150 10 3 3 Certificate Details focccicscivsicioncdasueisuan cinta iaedeasuniaawiadunisadincbiundeeaanunbinouddenenteadiasorkueays 152 1034 Load sined Cerei 5c vacdcecsa ncaa veanctpciceidedann ncaa Gane tedeeanwnes ntedadanetsoamteatenscenensenes 153 10 4 The Trusted GA II rusii N NN 154 10 4 1 View Trusted CA Certificate oo cece ccccsceeeececescesee eee eesseaeeeeseseuseaeaeeeeeeanees 156 10 4 2 lniport Trusted CA Certificat ccccnisiescsecenptteusshetiearientecctveenintaaleakes eeataaeedvcaaaeeedes 157 Chapter 11 eilen al e ART A A E EE E E EE A E E E E T E EA 159 Mi ORE orarin aaa aasa S a da SAA 159 Taal What You Can Do in Dis HSE 5 sa ciiescdasiadadircadaiegredeseiaiand eesiuden Relalegieteseedaiensis 159 Te TeS a 12 E c SEEEN ar a ees eee 160 1121 Silale Route Edit sieht evan ea ie eel ga tn cg wen i eta a ped 161 Chapter 12 Py POP WANA a REA AAE E A EREE 163 Te BE adi a 163 12 1 1 What You Gan Do i this Chapter a c nccisssecussitionsesenn tinea 163 t22 The Sali
236. ing IP traffic by specifying a new filter name and at least one condition below All of the specified conditions in this filter rule must be satisfied for the rule to take effect Click Apply Save to save and activate the filter Source IP address Source Subnet Mask Source Port port or port port Destination IP address Destination Subnet Mask Destination Port port or port port example TCP UDP fi 92 168 1 33 255 255 255 0 M Select All M Back ipoe_0_0_1_i ptm0_1 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Firewall gt Incoming Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the rule Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters including spaces To add a firewall rule you need to configure at least one of the following fields except the I nterface field Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP or I CMP and enter the protocol service type number in the port field Select NONE to apply the rule to any protocol Source IP Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Source Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask Source Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source Destination IP Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Destination Subnet Mask
237. instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 332 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 206 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example INTERNEJ WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2
238. ique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Action Click View to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Click Remove to delete the certificate Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of Certificate a certification authority that you trust to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate 10 4 1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate Figure 79 Trusted CA View Certificate Details Name vantage Type ca Subject C CN ST JiangSu L Wuxi O Zy XEL OU sw2 CN localhost emailAddress selina sun zyxel cn MIIDZTCCAs6gAwIBAgIBADANBgkqhkiGOwOBAQOF ADCBhDELMAKGALUEBHNCOO4x EDAOBGNVBAgGTBOppYW5nU3 UxDTALBQNVBAcTBFdleGkxDj AMBQNVBAOTBYpSUEVM NQuwCgYDVOOLEwNzdzIxEjAQBGNVBAMNTCUxvY2 FsaG9zaDEINCAaGCSqGs Ib3DQEJ ARYTc2VsalShLnNibkB6eXh1bC5jbj AeFwOwN AON OWNZO3NDNaF wOwNzA0NjOu NzQ3NDNaNIGENQswCOYDVOQQGE wJIDTJ EQNA4GA1UECBMHSmlhbmaTATENMASGALUE BxMEV3 V4aTEOMAvGA1UECHMF Jnl YRUwxDDAKBGNVBASTA3N3 Nj ESMBAGALUEAXMI bG93YWxob3NOMS IlwlaYJKoZ ThvcNAQkBFhNzZ2UxpbmEuc3 VuQHpSeGVsLmNuMIGt MAOGCSqGS Ib3 DOEBAQUAA4GNADCBiQKBgQC x 23 QyHyzj Oyj qSVqO msVad7F ZPC KVARZadmaMXiWE
239. it Add Click this button to create a new layer 2 interface P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 4 1 Layer 2 Interface Configuration Click the Add button in the Layer 2 Interface screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new layer 2 interface At the time of writing you can configure only one PTM layer 2 interface on the P 870HN 51D Figure 29 Layer 2 Interface Configuration DSL PTM WAN DSL PTM Interface Configuration Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection C VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection MSC Mode Multiple Service over one Connection Enable Quality Of Service Enabling packet level QoS for this PTM interface Use Advanced Setup Quality of Service to assign priorities for the applications Enable Quality Of Service Back Apply Save The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 13 Layer 2 Interface Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Select Default Mode to allow only one WAN service over a single Connection Mode virtual circuit Select MSC Mode to allow multiple WAN services over a single virtual circuit Each WAN connection has its own MAC address Select VLAN MUX Mode to allow multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single virtual circuit You need to assign a VLAN ID and priority level to traffic through each WAN connection All WAN connections
240. ive Select this check box to enable the rule Filter Name This displays the name of the rule Interfaces This displays the WAN interface s to which this rule is applied Protocol This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies Source Address This displays the source IP addresses and subnet mask to which this Mask rule applies Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any Source Port This is the source port number Dest Address Mask This displays the destination IP addresses and subnet mask to which this rule applies Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any Dest Port This is the destination port number Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Add Click Add to create a new rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewall 9 3 1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules In the Incoming screen click Add to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels Figure 71 Firewall gt Incoming Add M Active Filter Name Protocol Interface Add Firewall ACL rule Incoming The screen allows you to create a filter rule to identify incom
241. kes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker 14 3 The Quality of Service General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS set the upstream bandwidth for WAN and downsteam bandwidth for LAN WLAN Upstream bandwdith refers to resources alloted to traffic which goes from the LAN device to the WAN device On the other hand downstream bandwidth refers to resources alloted to traffic that comes back from the WAN device to the LAN device 170 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Click Advanced gt QoS to open the screen as shown next Figure 87 QoS General General I Enable QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth kbps LAN WLAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth kbps You can assign the managed bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically Upstream traffic priority will be automatically assigned by one z m a The following table describes the labels in this screen
242. l End Port Internal Start Port Internel End Port Server IP Address Protocol ipoe_0_0 1_1 ptm0_1 Y 192 168 1 33 TCP x Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule This field is read only if you click the Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port forwarding rules P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 38 Port Forwarding Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION External Start Enter the original destination port for the packets Port To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field External End Enter the last port of the original destination port range Port To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port
243. l N aie Anan ene meatal 219 20 1 1 What YOu Ga De TMS Chapter a iaritersisincspiaws essai nash chaskninds aoaaa 219 20 2 The General SO seios rE ana ee 219 20S The Tite Soling STe dirsi EAN N A 220 Chapter 21 LOOS sscscissiaisaisaiassnsistaidstasiadaciaiaisdscnidstaisadaiiasaniaasesiasasisanaiaddesiadiaiaedshbdssabeasniiadaaneieddsdasidiadicehe 223 ELTONI airea E errr perenne errr rrearee rare 223 2111 What You Can Davin tis Chapter cies csiitecs nainii aei 223 21 2 Ihe View Log SUEN anniiicesinninii aso a aaa A aii 223 219 The LOG Seting ROOM oerinoar a Ar aa EA OE ia 224 Chapter 22 TO BicsasssinssataanessniacsaasasninaatenansansnisninasnnnasiasadseiansiaiadsaisniannaiaaxanseasnianamAaanseinnindsbimnsaasaniiensasanaanna 227 Soy Ce 2 ener L en E A N sen A A E Saree este ene meter cen nr Tn 227 221 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ccc tsaxoses sscvicaneceesdddasseceniacgevensasdaaesnensdaeeseueddaataonss 227 22a De PI Wale EEE in a A E nein ANEA 228 22a Mbe Coniouranomn Sera oP yeaa aaan a N eiaa RSA SE AAi 230 224 The Rea GOCO ike aei r a E a a 232 Chapter 23 DPA SENG ics csstestadassiacansisaaaassnenananiasdasaasarsadansesanseaiasdedaaneasesdAstesnanasanhsanesiareadaadadnasesndaddaaaenmalsane 235 PE Ra Be dress T tinh uk casey E daub dan aids tea AE tSakeiue 235 23 1 1 What You san Do inthis Chapter lt ciciies cists eoiasmeiaeanacsncecinceesdabeiasselaaaiadeebrotiuceqneseis 235 ave NYE VOU WESC To Ney eis sccicnicctesidisadventsentean ene a
244. l Panel gt Network Connections and then open a Local Area Connection to display the following screen Figure 140 TCP IP Networking Component Local Area Connection Properties General Advanced Connect using E9 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Etheme This connection uses the following items M dE Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Tpi aiin v3 7 5 0 V Intemet Protocol TCP IP Uninstall Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Note Most operating systems ship with TCP IP already installed and enabled See your Windows documentation for details on installing or configuring TCP IP The Command Line Interface To open the Windows command line interface Click Start gt Run In the Run dialog box enter cmd then click OK Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open amd OK Cancel Browse The Command Prompt window opens cx Command Prompt icrosoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2666 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2061 Microsoft Corp gt v0l Volume in drive C is ZyXEL Volume Serial Number is 7 CA 53F1 gt vol Command Syntax and Parameters Command descriptions always indicate
245. ly Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 272 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 146 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To fal Media Player Classic gt Default Programs All Programs Help and Support omman S _ SelB as 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network and Internet icon Figure 147 Windows Vista Control Panel GS Control Panel P File Edit View Tools Help e Control Panel Home F S
246. m a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the op
247. m receiving power of the line Actual INP This indicates the actual impulse noise protection INP Total Attenuation This indicates the upstream downstream attenuation Attainable Net This indicates the maximum upstream downstream net data rate Data Rate currently attainable on this line VDSL Band The fields in this section indicate the status for upstream bands 0 1 2 3 Status UO U1 U2 U3 and downstream bands 1 2 3 D1 D2 D3 Line This indicates the line attenuation status for each upstream and Attenuation downstream band NA displays when the band is not used Signal This indicates the signal attenuation status for each upstream and Attenuation downstream band NA displays when the band is not used SNR Margin This indicates the signal to noise ratio for each upstream and downstream band NA displays when the band is not used Transmit This indicates the line transmission power for each upstream and Power downstream band NA displays when the band is not used Since Link time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the connection is up FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures since the last reset CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s since the last reset ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs since the last reset SES This indicates the
248. mber to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 196 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 EPE o SQ eee FS SSS SS SS How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID es ee ee se Serr rtretrtrteteeeler hd varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host
249. ment than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both i
250. might be reduced RTS CTS Enter a value between 0 and 2432 Threshold Fragmentation This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value Threshold between 256 and 2432 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 34 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Number of Specify the maximum number from 1 to 64 of the wireless stations that Wireless may connect to the P 870HN 51D Stations Allowed Output Power Set the output power of the P 870HN 51D If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 20 40 60 80 or 100 802 11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed mode networks networks with both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g traffic Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS CTS handshake This helps improve IEEE 802 11g performance Select Off to disable 802 11 protection The transmission rate of your P 870HN 51D might be reduced in a mixed mode network This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b Only Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list menu Choices are Long or Short The default setting is Long See the appendix for more information This field is not configurable and the P 870HN 51D uses Short when you set 802 1
251. mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area P 870HN 51D User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 112 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication IPSEC_TUNNEL He
252. n Table 61 QoS Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new entry No This is the index number of this entry Active Select the check box to enable the queue Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the name of the P 870HN 51D s interface through which traffic in this queue passes Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue 172 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 61 QoS Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue Management Queue management algorithms determine how the P 870HN 51D should handle packets when it receives too many network congestion Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the queue Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D 14 4 1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue Figure 89 QoS Queue Setup Add Queue Configuration Enable Name Interface 7 Priority fi x Weight
253. n Use this screen to view and configure your P 870HN 51D s trigger port settings Figure 65 Trigger Port Trigger Port Trigger Port Service Name WAN Interface Trigger port Protocol Open port Protocol aim Talk 7 fipoe_0_04_1iptmo_ 1 J Start pet End E 5191 ke 7 Start 4099 End f4099 tcp 7 Ada Interface Start Port Port Proto Start Port Port Proto Vv Aim Talk ptmO_1 5191 5191 4099 4099 1 Note The sum of trigger ports in all rules must be less than 1000 and every open port range must be less than 1000 When the protocol is TCP UDP the ports are counted twice Apply Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 NAT Trigger Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Select a pre defined service from the drop down list box The pre defined service port number s and protocol will display in the Trigger port Open port and Protocol fields Otherwise select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where you can manually enter the port number s and select the transport layer protocol WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Trigger Port The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the P 870HN 51D to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN
254. n the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the P 870HN 51D The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your P 870HN 51D but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 870HN 51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 870HN 51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet P
255. n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set Dentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the P 870HN 51D from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 870HN 51D s SSID or wireless security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P 870HN 51D s new settings Hide Network Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a Name SSID station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the P 870HN 51D when wireless LAN is enabled Security See the following sections for more details about this field Mode MAC Filter Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the P 870HN 51D using this SSID Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless device
256. n may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED IN
257. n page 293 Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 141 Windows XP Start Menu Re Internet Explorer 5 My Documents Q Outlook Express Y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W D s BY Command Prompt Co My Music et a Acrobat Reader 4 0 My Computer Tour windows xP 2 My Recent Documents My Pictures E Windows Movie Maker be Printers and Faxes Help and Support yp seach All Programs gt Run BD ico FF fO tun off computer untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network Connections icon Figure 142 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q X P Search E Folders z G Control Panel Address gt va Control Panel GB Switch to Category view See Also d Windows Update Game Controllers 270 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 143 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties ocal Area Connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Short
258. n source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINES
259. nclude a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common
260. nd devices Connect to a network C Set up a canne tinn or network 4 k 9 d Manage network connections A TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 150 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center LAN or High Sessd Internet 11 ad Local Collapse group Left Arrow A Conne x get Wet Expand all groups Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue 274 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Figure 151 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties Connect using oy Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items M o Client for Microsoft Networks M E Network Monitor3 Driver MI 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks wee ntemmet Protocol Version 4 TCF IF v4 Re i Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnect
261. nfiguration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the P 87O0HN 51D see Section 7 7 on page 115 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the P 870HN 51D you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful 7 9 4 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new
262. nfigurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the P 870HN 51D Wireless Functionality wireless devices only Allow the IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and or IEEE 802 11n wireless clients to connect to the P 870HN 51D wirelessly Enable wireless security WEP WPA 2 WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator to put it on the P 870HN 51D Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the P 870HN 51D s configuration You can put it back on the P 870HN 51D later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Use this feature to have the P 870HN 51D assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your Protocol network Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients Dynamic DNS With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use Support a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS servi
263. ng 6 9 12 18 24 36 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 48 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the P 870HN 51D are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the P 870HN 51D identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your P 870HN 51D Table 109 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption EEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Most Secure WPA2 Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the P 870HN 51D and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RA
264. ng screen Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route Figure 85 Policy Forwarding Add Policy Route Setup Policy Name Source IP Address Protocol Source Port Use Interface Source Mac Address ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_1 v Back l Apply l Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Policy Forwarding Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Source IP Enter the source IP address Address Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Enter the source port number Source Mac Address Enter the source MAC address Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the WAN screens P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding Table 58 Policy Forwarding Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding P 870HN 51D User s Guide RIP 13 1 Overview Routing Information Protocol RIP RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a device to e
265. ngs and firewall rules to find out why the P 870HN 51D does not respond to HTTPS can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the P 870HN 51D 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default admin user name is admin and default admin password is 1234 The default user name is user and the default user password is user These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 Turn the P 870HN 51D off and on 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 24 1 on page 239 cannot Telnet to the P 870HN 51D See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot access the P 870HN 51D again after configuring a new interface group Make sure your computer is connected to a LAN port in the default group Otherwise you need to use the P 870HN 51D s LAN IP address for the new group to access the P 870HN 51D again 24 3 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connection
266. nocnamuaunaereaslenies 91 02 What PIER TO KNOW cestas s n ANSEES TE AOE EAREN 92 Co TE LANIF TOCE sh ce sh eet cent accents a te tee eta cacindiedy caeees epeaaes 93 6 4 lecmied Pees es ss eas sees os easy snancsaseuases NAA 95 Chapter 7 WEISS LAN Poreceeeererersreeny teeter reresrr Terri rerererrererrrtrrererrererrrrrr rere reerrererrertrr reer rrerrerrrrr iriver rr retry 99 I ia sed ect tcd asahe ee tudes aici pag asuee cade ca ed es ad se ce 99 Ai Wha You Can Do wi TS Gape soniai NN 99 TA WNnat ron Need tO RMON aodrei A a Eaa 100 Vad Belore VOU BGI caricis r E OS 102 7A TS Se ON srreniiamian dennin ia a R 102 FEA MO DEEI siensa i 104 Tke WEP EDOYPIO drsati A AE eerecees tre 106 P AEA E OES a uiieiaiins Grbariawstioeheaunnlbbisinefutaliuentitaliniues 107 LAA PAI RUNON AIO nioonauannenn aa 108 TOS MAG PIE enoront oriana 110 74 8 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule ssu isassosseseceiresscoadanseserssiatensaaainoonteeaiunssieanas 111 TOTE MOG AF OEE iue caedy W epd waule Sect decneeaty aude aus dmemedeaiesaareeetames 112 Fo Meme AP EG oa 113 TO TUE es OI pansin tetaiaau Hida a 113 PTE WFS SIO ROR oaeiae e rA cainii 115 To ME Ce Seip ND asanda ai aa Rs S ERA 116 79 lechnical PROT BISNIS sorniera E AE EERE 117 7 9 1 Wireless Network OYervi w sssorossiistesssina naianei niania aiia 118 7 9 2 Additonal Wireless TENTS sinasina aa aa ardana raakaa 119 TOS Wireless Security OYerviBW saiisine ae eiar AOE 119 704 WIF PIGiecied Se s
267. not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 7 9 3 3 on page 120 for information about this Table 36 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security Static WEP t WPA PSK WPA Stronges WPA2 PSK WPA2 t For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the P 870HN 51D and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your P 870HN 51D you can also s
268. not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is th
269. nsmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 5 The Class Setup Screen 174 Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the P 870HN 51D forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click QoS gt Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 90 QoS Class Setup Class Setup Create anew Class Add 4 maximum 32 entries can be configured order activelclass Name Classification Criteria Forward To DSCP Mark 002 1P Hark VLAN ID Tao To Queue Modify From Intf LAN1 Ether Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Qi g ini al Vv ci Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS The following table describ
270. nt jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties Note Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the open source code licenses To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please check ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw to get it P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements Open Source Packages for P 870HN 51D 3RD PARTY VERSION WEB ADDRESS OF THE SOFTWARE LICENSE SOFTWARE TERM MIPS Linux kernel 2 6 21 5 http www linux mips org Bridge Utils 1 2 http bridge sourceforge net bftpd 1 0 24 http www bftpd org busybox 1 00 http www busybox net Dnsmasq 2 48 http www thekelleys org uk dnsmasq ebtables 2 0 6 http ebtables sourceforge net iproute2 2 4 7 http www linuxgrill com anonymous iproute2 iptables 1 3 8 http www netfilter org NTFS 3G 1 231 http www ntfs 3g org openSSL openSSL 0 9 7f http www openssl org source license html library PPP 2 4 1 http ppp samba org SSH server 0 46 http www opensource org licenses mit dropbear license php Samba 3 0 34 http www samba org udhcp 0 9 6 http udhcp busybox net zebra 0 93a http www zebra org Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein
271. oS packet statistics click Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Figure 94 QoS gt Monitor Miaa Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh x Interface Monitor pol none zee oan bps bps ptmo_1 2 LAN WLAN 88616 Queue Monitor a ee bps bps 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the P 870HN 51D to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics Interface Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the WAN interface on the P 870HN 51D Pass This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully Drop This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped Queue Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the queue Pass This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully Drop This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 14 8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 870HN 51D features described in this chapter IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header
272. ocumentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY W
273. of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP P 870HN 51D User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 8 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the P 870HN 51D Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 8 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Port Forwarding screen lets you configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 8 3 on page 130 e The Trigger Port screen lets you change the P 870HN 51D s trigger port settings Section 8 4 on page 133 The DMZ Host screen lets you configure a default server Section 8 5 on page 137 e The ALG screen lets you enable SIP ALG on the P 870HN 51D Section 8 6 on page 138 8 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP
274. ogram Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appr
275. on contains additional technical information about the P 870HN 51D features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The P 870HN 51D can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the P 870HN 51D is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup PPP over Ethernet Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Op
276. on in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 111 System Tray Icon i Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 112 Internet Connection Status Y internet Connection Status eV General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer Packets Sent 8 Received 5 943 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the P 870HN 51D without finding out the IP address of the P 870HN 51D first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the P 870HN 51D Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 113 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back P P Search ey Folders Gi amp Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled C Wh Internet Connection I Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local Area
277. onfigure your device you can backup the configuration file to a computer That way if you later misconfigure the device you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings The firmware determines the device s available features and functionality You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your P 870HN 51D What You Can Do in this Chapter The Firmware screen lets you upload firmware to your device Section 22 2 on page 228 e The Configuration screen lets you backup and restore device configurations Section 22 3 on page 230 You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default e The Restart screen lets you restart your P 870HN 51D Section 22 4 on page 232 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 227 Chapter 22 Tools 22 2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools to open the Firmware screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your P 870HN 51D The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the P 870HN 51D while firmware upload
278. onnect n Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 282 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab Figure 163 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab ean Network a Showall Q Location Automatic EZ Show Built in Ethernet H CP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 M Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure IPv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field type the IP address of your device Figure 164 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet eeo _ _ a Showa Network Q Location Automatic E3 Show Built in Ethernet E TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually HA IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0
279. opriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions P 870HN 51D User s Guide 347 Appendix G Open Software Announcements and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a vol
280. orary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Tools to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 131 Error Message P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools 22 3 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 132 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset Browse Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the P 870HN 51D s current configuration to a file on you
281. ord 12345 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Service Provider WiW DynDNS ORG Host Name zyxelrouter dyndns org Interface ipoe_0_0 1_1 ptm0_1 User Name UserName Password Email Key Apply Cancel 2e Click Apply 2 5 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the P 870HN 51D from the Internet To test this 1 Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet 2 Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter 3 The P 870HN 51D s login page should appear You can then log into the P 870HN 51D and manage it 2 6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the P 870HN 51D s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials In the following figure router R is connected to the P 870HN 51D s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 network the traffic is sent to the P 870HN 51D s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic You need to specify a static routing rule on the P 870HN 51D to specif
282. ork name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 58 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES tI O E amp I WPS HANDSHAKE ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL ey D C SECURITY INFO P D COMMUNICATION The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar
283. ort mappings there were automatically created Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using Intenet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected P 870HN 51D User s Guide 203 Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Services Select ihe services nnd on pour nelmk that Inlemel wee car Pe Et Serices Fl marisa 792 168 1 658618 1 BEDS TEF Bal merece 192 168 1 66 9859 27777 UDF marge 1921681 91 7281 20037 UDF EA meme 192 110 F810 3907 TCP Figure 110 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service E Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 6 Select Show ic
284. ot available for an ATM connection MTU 1 1500 Type the maximum size of each data packet in bytes that can move through this interface If a larger packet arrives the P 870HN 51D divides it into smaller fragments Allowed values are 1 1500 Usually this value is 1500 Tag VLAN ID for egress packets Select this option to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode Enter 802 1P Priority IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from O to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection This field is available when the PTM interface is in VLAN MUX mode Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server The screen differs by the encapsulation you selected in the previous screen See Section 5 6 on page 84 for more information P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup PPPoE This screen displays when you select PPP
285. ot including spaces Type This field displays general information about the certificate signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate request means this is a certification request P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 10 Certificate Table 50 Certificate Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organization O State ST and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form This displays null in a certification request You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Private Key This read only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the private key into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Signing Request This re
286. ough this connection null means the entry is not valid Received Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface Transmitted Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Refresh Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 2 Route Info Routing is based on the destination address only and the P 870HN 51D takes the shortest path to forward a packet Click Status gt Route I nfo to access this screen Use this screen to view the internal routing table on the P 870HN 51D Figure 22 Status gt Route Info Route Info Flags U up reject G gateway H host R reinstate D dynamic redirect
287. over Ethernet PPPoE in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 33 WAN Configuration PPPoE provided to you IPv4 Address Multicast Proxy PPP Username and Password PPP usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below enter the user name and password that your ISP has PPP Username l PPP Password PPPoE Service Name Authentication Method 4UTO M V Enable NAT Full NAT Symmetric Port Restricted Restricted Type NAT cone NAT ConenatT OO ag V Dial on demand with idle timeout timer Inactivity Timeout minutes 1 4320 fo V Use Static IPv4 Address Enable PPP Debug Mode Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy 0 0 0 0 Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 WAN Configuration PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPPoE Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here P 870HN 51D User s Guide T7 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 17 WAN Configuration PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Method The P 870HN 51D support
288. p Communication Components Communications To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components M 2 NetMeeting amp Phone Dialer Universal Plug and Play Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details n 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 200 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 104 Network Connections s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Eeteen lt A Operator Assisted Dialing Back QJ S 2 75 Dial up Preferences Address e Network Connections Network Identification Bridge
289. p up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 187 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings t Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Pe
290. page 95 for background information Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your P 870HN 51D Figure 41 LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP GroupName Defaut z IP Address 172 23 26 249 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Setup M Enable DHCP DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address fi 72 23 26 33 Pool Size jz C DHCP Relay Relay Server l DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface Use the following Static DNS IP address First DNS Server foooo Second DNS Server ooo IGMP Snooping 7 Enable IGMP Snooping Standard Mode Blocking Mode IP Alias I Enable IP Alias IP Address l IP Subnet Mask l Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 23 LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP IP Group Name Select the interface group for which you want to configure the LAN TCP IP settings See Chapter 19 on page 213 for how to create a new interface group IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your P 870HN 51D in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default DHCP Setup Enable DHCP Select this to have the P 870HN 51D act as a DHCP s
291. password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre P 870HN 51D User s Guide 331 Appendix E Wireless LANs authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system
292. phone Switch Router 6 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device e Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it
293. ppendix A Network Troubleshooting Additionally you can use netstat e to display Ethernet statistics as the following example C gt netstat e Interface Statistics Received Bytes 25250033 Unicast packets 38838 Non unicast packets 38227 Discards 0 Errors 0 Unknown protocols 787 Sent 7060325 34744 175 0 35 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 267 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting P 870HN 51D User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific P 870HN 51D may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 269 e Windows Vista on page 273 e Windows 7 on page 277 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 281 e Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 on page 285 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 288 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE o
294. prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services DS field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP
295. properties LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP DHCP and IP alias settings Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings WLAN authentication security settings and MAC filtering rules More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the P 870HN 51D WPS Use this screen to enable WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup and view the WPS status WPS Station Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network Advanced Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings Setup NAT Port The NAT screens are available only when you enable NAT in a Forwarding WAN connection Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world Trigger Port Use this screen to change your P 870HN 51D s port triggering settings DMZ Host Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen ALG Use this screen to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P 870HN 51D Security Firewall Incoming This screen shows a summary of the IP filtering rules and allows you to add or remove an incoming IP filtering rule that allows P 870HN 51D User s Guide incoming traffic from the WAN Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Certificate Local Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage Certificates certif
296. r address from the ISP P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup P 870HN 51D User s Guide LAN Setup 6 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses e See Section 6 4 on page 95 for more information on LANs e See Appendix E on page 321 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The LAN IP screen lets you set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL device and configure other LAN TCP IP settings Section 6 3 on page 93 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 2 What You Need To Know IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number This is known as an Internet Protocol address Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 870HN 51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 870HN 51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server This
297. r pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software Certain components of the Software and third party open source programs included with the Software have been or may be made available by ZyXEL listed in the below Table collectively the Open Sourced Components You may modify or replace only these Open Sourced Components provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components which have been provided on the License Notice as below for the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components or by applicable law you may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize
298. r 181 t47 Mhe Goo MICRA OOO I masarnia i aaae aO a aaa aT 183 TAS Techical POT ONGS orcii 184 14 8 1 Automatic Priority Queue ASSIGNMENT ceccceeeteececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeetaaeeteeees 185 14 9 2 Talie Pollcing Meter Typos xcscicsscec sesiadsccassitiestnancviessbat vindesncthd dhedupbacylodeeb eudacannnnias 186 Chapter 15 Dynami DNS Setup ersa a a 189 TOT OVON urana an Hanae eA ain eA de UaatOnNN 189 1511 What You Can Doin this Chapter sctersieaiendsiess csi wiskercnssnndeanaddasbasmciadlouiiadan 189 19 2 What You Need To KOW sosssiscsiannsetinandi ieia a A R aa 189 iao The Dynami DNS GETEN erratia S Terre ree ttre 190 Chapter 16 Remote MANA GOING wiieiectesscsscicescstniasinesesscsassnnidainiasiniiadasienieisdiseiasiaiansndiassasaesaidasceibasaiaasiaies 191 1O T OVONION purren seul egeihateded cduntacelaaiadsbalecatlaaoud adlemcalaaiianledannodauasiaannaets 191 111 What You Gan Do in this Chapter soiis maiad aina a 191 102 ihe TR 0C9 Pi asians shea cnertutes tap ircerteeoneatint bw tlanis a a a 191 16 Tine TR OGA OGIGEI pirineo ar Ee a E AE Ea 193 164 The Senice Control SEGET seisshastrnselii anderen en nr 194 16 5 me IP Address Screen arasan ea 195 16 5 4 Adding an IP AdIGSS siscaidiiia a 196 Chapter 17 Univ rsal Plug and Play UPP Yassin ccs stan sast ake cneenenccneeaircentntentcrandateenneaansevecaatanni 197 7 APOE e a nded sind A 197 171 1 What You Can Doin this Chaplet sccscsccatscccsetesnti tate aiea renee 197 1752 WIRE E A E
299. r computer Once your P 870HN 51D is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the P 870HN 51D s current configuration to your computer Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your P 870HN 51D Table 89 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools Table 89 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Do not turn off the P 870HN 51D while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a restore configuration successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the P 870HN 51D again Figure 133 Configuration Upload Successful The P 870HN 51D automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop
300. rded within the last 15 minutes time minute time segment FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures within the last 15 minute time segment CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s within the last 15 minute time segment ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs within the last 15 minute time segment SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds SESs within the last 15 minute time segment UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS within the last 15 minute time segment LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal LOS failures within the last 15 minute time segment LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing LOF failures within the last 15 minute time segment Latest 1 day time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the last 1 day period FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds FECs failures since the last 1 day period CRC This indicates the number of CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s since the last 1 day period P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 Status gt VDSL Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds ESs since
301. re your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 288 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network 9 aE T E Hardware Drivers elp and Support De Hardware Testing g About GNOME About Ubuntu Quit pa Language Support EJ Login Window 4 Network Tools 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Figure 172 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections oF Nenworic Setnngs E a Bu Location s Connections General DNS Hosts yProperties a Point to point connec This network interface is not c Help views EJ close P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 4 In the Authenticate window enter
302. reatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Pr
303. red you must enter static DNS server IP addresses Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface selected ipoe_O_0_1 1 ptm0_1 Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Back Next P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 WAN Configuration DNS Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain DNS info Select this to have the P 870HN 51D get the DNS server addresses from a WAN from the ISP automatically interface WAN Interface Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the DNS selected related information Use the following Select this to have the P 870HN 51D use the DNS server addresses Static DNS IP you configure manually address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 7 Configuration Summary This read only screen shows the current WAN connection settings Figure 38 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary Service Name IP Address Service State modifications WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Connection Type Service Category ism ll
304. rface this field displays Up when the P 870HN 51D is using the interface and NoLink when the line is disconnected For the WLAN interface it displays Up when WLAN is enabled or Disabled when WLAN is not active P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate More Status WAN Service Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN connection s See Section 4 2 1 on page 58 Route Info Click this link to view the internal routing table on the P 870HN 51D See Section 4 2 2 on page 60 WLAN Station List Click this link to display the MAC address es of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the P 870HN 51D See Section 4 2 3 on page 61 VDSL Statistics Click this to check the VDSL status and detailed performance data LAN Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics on the LAN and WLAN interfaces See Section 4 2 5 on page 66 Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information See Section 4 2 6 on page 66 4 2 1 WAN Service Statistics Click Status gt WLAN Service Statistics to access
305. rials 4 know it MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the MAC Mask if you know it IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192 168 1 23 Type the IP Subnet Mask if you This maps e mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority which you have created in the previous screen see the IP Protocol field This also maps your computer s IP address and MAC address to the E mail queue see the Source fields Verify that the queue setup works by checking Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor This shows the bandwidth alloted to e mail traffic compared to other network traffic Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh 7 Interface Monitor pel na Ds as bps bps 1 ptm0_1 24712 0 2 392080 0 LAN WLAN Queue Monitor P 870HN 51D User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 3 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 6 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default
306. rmissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 188 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings lA Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable C3 information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing 2 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 189 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Cl
307. rs P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 64 QoS Class Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP ICMP or IGMP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number IP fae This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Lengt Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 28 to 1500 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this op
308. rver IP address the Server P 870HN 51D passes to the DHCP clients IGMP Snooping Enable IGMP Select this option to enable IGMP snooping This allows the P 870HN Snooping 51D to passively learn multicast group ee Select this to have the P 870HN 51D forward multicast packets to a Mode port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 23 LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Blocking Mode Select this to have the P 870HN 51D block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN Enable IP Alias Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the P 870HN 51D IP Address Enter the IP address of your P 870HN 51D in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for Mask example 255 255 255 0 factory default Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D 6 4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 870HN 51D features described in this chapter LANs WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the P 870HN 51D ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 42 LAN and WAN IP Addresses a eee ee eee
309. rypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a Short key which is very easy to guess Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN which you
310. s For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 100 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNETMASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts 312 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 197 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Ane m a a a Nt che a i i I i I i I a I i I I I I i i l i l i r 5 D a I 192 168 1 0 24 q a See ema ee eee ee eee You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two
311. s Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility i Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections amp Java Q J Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr caplet bequres estat gt 2 1 4 1_0 for J Use Java 2 viA1_07 fr lt appleb emutes estat gt requires restart Ej Microso se Java ae enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Mozilla Firefox a 2 gt Restore Defaults Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 194 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options IEAS Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Add ons Ctrl Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Page Info Ctrl Shift 4 FireFTP Clear Private Data Session Manager Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 19
312. s In the P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 200 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example uasS SS WAN CEE E Ea a 192 168 1 88 S adena aa S Eee ee eee Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 201 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example SSS SSS 192 168 1 1 WAN CE E EEE es Ea 192 168 1 1 SS a SS e 2 BE eee eee ee FP heii y i gt ra P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting P 870HN 51D User s Guide Wireless LANs Note Your specific P 870HN 51D may not support all of the wireless security types described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which wireless security types are supported Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent
313. s and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 23 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the WAN screens These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 5 If the problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection 1 Check if you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the DSL side to have the P 870HN 51D use the DSL port for Internet access P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 2 Make sure you configured a proper ATM or PTM layer 2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP 3 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection 1 Check if you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the WAN side to have the P 870HN 51D use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access 2 Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a
314. s networks coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies Wireless Security By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she he can either steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they enc
315. s 204 1 254 150 19 154 ms 253 ms 154 ms 192 0 32 10 Trace complete C gt Here the tracert to www example com took 18 hops to reach its destination Looking at the latency data you ll see the first slow down happens at hop 10 The extremely low latency on the first few hops indicates a network local to the computer where the tracert command originated such as a home or office LAN The packets then move onto the local WAN such as your Internet Service Provider s network Because of the close proximity of those servers to your computer the latency remains low Once the data packets move out of the regional network to the first international server at hop 10 in this example the latency increases This is because of the distance between the regional and international servers it physically takes longer for the response to get back to your computer Finally on transition hop 15 from the server in Japan to the server in California another latency spike occurs If you were having connection problems this would most likely be the source of it For whatever reason the server in Japan has a less than optimal connection with its counterpart in the United States P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting In this example we abridge the tracert results table to show only server IP addresses and not domain names by using the d parameter We also use the hn parameter to limit the number of hops
316. s PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your P 870HN 51D accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your P 870HN 51D accepts CHAP only PAP Your P 870HN 51D accepts PAP only MSCHAP Your P 870HN 51D accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the P 870HN 51D You can also select the NAT Type you want the P 870HN 51D to implement The choices are as follows e Symmetric NAT default Symmetric NAT maps requests from the same private IP address and port to a different public source IP Aa and or port depending on the packet s destination IP address e Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted cone NAT maps all requests from the same private IP address and port to the same public source IP address and port e Restricted Cone NAT Restricted cone NAT maps all requests ao the same private IP address to the same public source IP address e Full Cone NAT In full cone NAT all requests from the same private IP address and port are mapped to the same public source IP address and port Someone on the Internet only needs to know the mapping scheme in order to send packets to a device behind the N
317. s and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it P 870HN 51D User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax
318. s of the device Model Name Enter the model name of the device Serial Enter the serial number of the device Number Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide 217 Chapter 19 Interface Group P 870HN 51D User s Guide System Settings 20 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval 20 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you configure system settings Section 20 2 on page 219 The Time Setting screen lets you set the system time Section 20 3 on page 220 20 2 The General Screen Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system password Click Maintenance gt System to open the General screen Figure 124 Maintenance gt System gt General UserName Password UserName admin Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm A Caution Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Apply Cancel P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 20 System Settings The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Maintenance gt System gt Genera LABEL DESCRI
319. s on your Local Area Network LAN V Enable NAT Symmetric NAT Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted Cone NAT Full Cone NAT Enable Firewall IGMP Multicast Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 WAN Configuration NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the P 870HN 51D You can also select the NAT Type you want the P 870HN 51D to implement The choices are as follows e Symmetric NAT default Symmetric NAT maps requests from the same private IP address and port to a different public source IP eaten and or port depending on the packet s destination IP address e Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted cone NAT maps all requests from the same private IP address and port to the same public source IP address and port e Restricted Cone NAT Restricted cone NAT maps all requests from the same private IP address to the same public source IP address e Full Cone NAT In full cone NAT all requests from the same private IP address and port are mapped to the same public source IP address and port Someone on the Internet only needs to know the mapping scheme in order to send packets to a device behind the NAT router Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate Firewall on this connection Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the P 870HN 51D act as an IG
320. s to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your P 870HN 51D your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 45 Wireless LAN gt General No Security Wireless Setup BSSID Security Mode MAC Filter M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection e 7 Bandwidth 20MHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL I Hide Network Name SSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C No Security Edit Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Wireless LAN gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Choose No Security from the drop down list box Mode P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 4 2 WEP Encryption In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 46 Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection 6 7 Bandwidth 20mHz 7 Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL 7 Hide Network Name SSID BSSID 00 19 CB 00 00 0C Security Mode WEP X WEP Encryption 128 bit x i Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9
321. sconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 110 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity No No Yes Yes No Protection WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key manage
322. se you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically fare wo nm ran a 0 _ J 259 255 255 0 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit Pe 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Figure 159 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties a 10 x Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple
323. se that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Voice over IP VoIP or Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers 14 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth Section 14 3 on page 170 e The Queue Setup screen lets you lets you configure QoS queue assignment Section 14 4 on page 172 e The Class Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS classifiers Section 14 5 on page 174 e The Policer Setup screen lets you control ingress or incoming traffic Section 14 6 on page 180 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS e The Monitor screen lets you view the P 870HN 51D s QoS related packet statistics Section 14 7 on page 183 14 2 What You Need to Know QoS versus CoS QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging ma
324. secsasssdaaiasiaisdsassssiasteneaiasanianianeciansaaiaidaiealaniease 53 ee eee E E E E E E E E 55 MAAN fe NP E E AT E A A NE A E E E 69 LAN SCID aie E gcieeseerien Lacs indes tee adaceelasaae trees 91 MORE EAN anisa obiardnnnslasvecaiadpadsvneadaxacasant ia pentualeanuasuanwieeraunahaestatabueen Mamrenatabaiesas 99 Network Address Translation NAT cccsccicnecctucte cnn ciacied naeescue de necnsonie sendlactedendesatdinecnsaniecendiadiniess 129 PUPCWall E E E E A A A E A A EEE 141 EIN EE e E E AAA TEA AE O EA IE A O E A AT 147 SUC RONIE sasaina e r 159 Policy Forwarding saeia bani ser eaiiy nade Sean aa ae dame 163 POI sess AT nor uininiaa anes A ieee ait aand A A A T E E A E E A Need satus 167 CSAP OT Serica JIG reen ENER 169 Byname DNS SSE aana EE EE NE ATE 189 aea e E a TE EE I E E E T A E O E E 191 Universal Plug and Play UPnP ctcsstccscsesicetcsndstinessadonsureranaeetinineacqnnnentanineninndaadsutteanndehbarbedadd 197 Faena COnN an N REEN 209 ie RII S a PPE A E E EE E E E a 213 Gysen SeN i A A 219 LOS anaa E E 223 EE E E E A E O A E AA E E E E E A T 227 DIROS IC c aa aaa a 235 TOU USUI o sie ccnuea yet atuiin ss auenuudy dante Wiser anand yaa nels sean tiuaule ana alts eomteyi an 239 Frode Specioal IS ciano anA R 247 P 870HN 51D User s Guide 9 Contents Overview P 870HN 51D User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide cc cacti ees ater cece baaa aa aaa aan eid 3 D u ument Conv
325. separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 198 Subnetting Example After Subnetting p 192 168 1 0 25 192 168 1 128 25 eon foe oe oe Gus aaa ss P 870HN 51D User s Guide 313 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 2 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet
326. sk P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field enter the IP address of your P 870HN 51D Figure 169 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet BOO Location Automatic E e Internal Modem QS Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE Q your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet f FireWire ws Not Connected 2 Subnet Mask AirPort A or a Router DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 a a Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click Apply and close the window P 870HN 51D User s Guide 287 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 170 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility 800 Network Utility Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger PortScan aterface for information Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configu
327. ss es Rate Committed Enter the maximum committed burst size for the specified class es Burst Size Conforming Select the action that the P 870HN 51D applies to packets that Action conform to the meter type selected Choices are Pass Drop and DSCP mark e Pass the packet is allowed to flow to its destination e Drop the packet is discarded e DSCP mark the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed accordingly See Section 14 8 1 on page 185 for information on DSCP mark Non Select the action that the P 870HN 51D applies to packets that do not comforming conform to the meter type selected Choices are Pass Drop and Action DSCP mark e Pass the packet is allowed to flow to its destination e Drop the packet is discarded e DSCP mark the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed accordingly See Section 14 8 1 on page 185 for information on DSCP mark Regularted Use the Add and Remove buttons to select or deselect classes to which the policy applies Available Class This shows the available classes Selected Class This shows classes to which the policy applies Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 14 7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the P 870HN 51D s Q
328. stem gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time Current Time This field displays the time of your P 870HN 51D Each time you reload this page the P 870HN 51D synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your P 870HN 51D Each time you reload this page the P 870HN 51D synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this option to enter the time and date manually Get from Time Select this option to have the P 870HN 51D get the time and date from Server the time server you specified below First NTP time Select an NTP time server from the drop down list box server Otherwise select Other and enter the IP address or URL up to 20 Second NTP extended ASCII characters in length of your time server time server Select None if you don t want to configure the time server Third NTP time f f server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Fourth NTP time server Fifth NTP time server Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide 221 Chapter 20 System Settings 222 P 870HN 51D User
329. subject to change without notice Your use of the P 870HN 51D is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions P 870HN 51D User s Guide 355 Appendix H Legal Information e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device of
330. table To update the ARP table Type arp d inet_addr or just use arp d to remove all entries in the ARP table For example type arp d 172 16 1 5 Type ping 172 16 1 5 and press Enter Next use the arp a command again to check whether the MAC address matches what you expected If it does not another computer may be using a duplicate IP address on the network Change the IP address on either computer to an unused one to fix this problem The route command line utility allows you to display or adjust your computer s network table The routing table on your computer contains the default gateway P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting and other route information When your computer wants to access an IP address on another network it references this table Syntax route print Parameters For the purposes of this section the print parameter is the most important If you enter route by itself the command s help page displays The following example shows the typical output of this command C gt route print Interface List 95 A A EESE E iy te sends uceteetonar donee ote MS TCP Loopback interface 0x1000003 00 02 e3 al b2 c3 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Driver Active Routes Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 16 1 254 172 516 1 32 1 L27000 2552 01 0720 127 0 0 1 1270 05 1 L722 E6 b0 2553 2552990
331. tallation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the
332. the P 870HN 51D e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the P 870HN 51D to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the P 870HN 51D You could simply restore your last configuration 1 5 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 2 LEDs on the Device P 870HN 51D User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the P 870HN 51D None of the LEDs are on if the P 870HN 51D is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLO STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR SYS Green On The P 870HN 51D is receiving power and ready for use Blinking The P 870HN 51D is self testing Red On The P 870HN 51D detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction Off The P 870HN 51D is not receiving power ETHERNET Green On The P 870HN 51D has a successful 10 Mbps Ethernet 1 4 connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The P 870HN 51D is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 10 Mbps Orange On The P 870HN 51D has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The
333. the apropriate subnet mask for a network 255 255 255 255 for a host or 0 0 0 0 for the default route Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer should send the matched packets Interface The IP address of an physical interface on this computer used to send the matched packets for this route entry Metric The metric hop count of this route Normally the lower the number the faster to a destination Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer sends all the rest packets if this computer cannot find any other matched routes for the packets Persistent Routes This section lists all routes that are manually configured In this example the 172 16 1 0 is the network address The 172 16 1 32 is the address of the local computer 172 16 1 255 is the network broadcast address which sends broadcast packets to all computers on the 172 16 1 x network 172 16 1 254 is the default gateway You may have more than one 0 0 0 0 entry if your computer has two or more network cards installed This may casue packets to be routed somewhere unexpected Delete all 0 0 0 0 entries except the one that you want to use for the default gateway In the following example the computer uses the first 0 0 0 0 entry for the default gateway Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 33 1 0730 0240 0 0 0 0 172 16 1 254 2M 6 2 1
334. the previous screen without saving changes Add Click this to create a new MAC filtering rule 7 4 6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule Click the Add button in the MAC Filter screen The following screen displays Figure 50 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter gt Add Add MAC Filter Address MAC Address foo 00 00 00 00 00 Back Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied Address access to the P 870HN 51D in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes Apply Click this to save your changes and go back to the previous screen P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 5 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks on the P 870HN 51D Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 51 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP More AP More AP Setup P active sso Security Modify 1 O ZyXEL2 No Security g 2 oO ZyXEL3 No Security SY 3 r ZyXEL4 No Security E Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen
335. this option Security Mode Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Active This field is only available for WPA2 PSK Select this if you want the P Compatible 870HN 51D to support WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKIP AES for data encryption Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new Update Timer group key out to all clients ReKey Method Select Time to change encryption keys automatically using the time interval specified in the Group Key Update Timer field If no value is entered in the said field this feature is disabled Select None if you do not want to use this feature 7 4 4 WPA 2 Authentication Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Note WPA or
336. tion Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 17 5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the P 870HN 51D Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the P 870HN 51D Turn on your computer and the P 870HN 51D Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 17 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 107 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back B Search Key Folders Gi e Network Connections m Internet Gateway Network Tasks E Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device il Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this connection Disable Status Create Shortcut Rename Properties 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the p
337. tion with the wireless device Note You must activate WPS in the P 870HN 51D and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other See Section 7 9 4 on page 121 for more information P 870HN 51D User s Guide Tutorials 2 1 Overview This chapter describes e How to Set up a Wireless Network on page 27 e Configuring the MAC Address Filter on page 36 e Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding on page 37 e Access the P 870HN 51D Using DDNS on page 38 e Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network on page 40 e Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup on page 43 Note The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your P 870HN 51D For details see the included Quick Start Guide For field descriptions of individual screens see the related technical reference in this User s Guide 2 2 How to Set up a Wireless Network This tutorial gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters The wireless clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly 2 2 1 Example Parameters SSID SSID_Example3 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey 802 11 mode IEEE 802 11b g n Mixed An access point AP or wireless router is referred to as AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB PCI adapter is referr
338. tion and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 79 Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS 14 6 The Policer Setup Screen A policer is a QoS policy Click QoS gt Policer Setup to open the following screen The P 870HN 51D can control ingress or incoming traffic by dropping packets that exceed the committed rate and or committed burst size specified in this screen Figure 92 QoS gt Policer Policer Setup Create a new Policer 1 Vv PL Add SE eaea D enoe l erame f p Pass Class 2 C2 SimpleTokenBucket Committed Burst Size Non Conforming Ee j 800 kbytes Action Drop Policer Setup Committed Rate 900 Conforming Action Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 QoS gt Policer Setup LABEL
339. tion that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 9 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 7 9 3 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might
340. to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 68 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic DiffServ QoS is used to
341. to 5 to test local connections only C gt tracert d h 5 www zyxel com Tracing route to a1524 g akamai net 203 69 113 16 over a maximum of 5 hops lt 1 ms lt 1 ms lt l ms 172 23 31 254 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172 23 6 113 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 172 23 6 253 17 ms 16 ms 14 ms 218 160 188 254 24 ms 25 ms 24 ms 10 42 232 150 Ob WNE Trace complete C gt arp Local network transmission is based on MAC addresses Data transmission between two networks is based on IP addresses Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol that converts IP addresses into MAC addresses Before a computer transmits data to an IP address on the same network it will check whether the IP address exists in its ARP table If it does the computer then sends the data directly to the mapped MAC address If it does not the computer broadcasts an ARP request to the network The host whose MAC address maps to the IP address responds When you use ping to check the connection to a computer no response does not mean the computer is not alive on the network The destination computer may be configured not to respond to any ping requests However you can use the arp a command line utility to check the IP addresses and MAC addresses of your neighboring computers or devices Syntax arp a Parameters arp d inet_addr s inet_addr eth_addr The d parameter can be use alone to remove all entries from an arp table or in conjunction with an IP address
342. ts for this virtual server WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded External Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service External End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service P 870HN 51D User s Guide fd Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 37 NAT Port Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Start This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Port Internal End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Server IP This field displays the inside IP address of the server Address Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 8 3 1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule Select User Define in the Service Name field or click the rule s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen Figure 63 Port Forwarding Edit Rule Setup M active Service Name WAN Interface External Start Port Externa
343. u want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 15 Dynamic DNS Setup 15 3 The Dynamic DNS Screen To change your P 870HN 51D s DDNS click Advanced gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 95 Advanced gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Service Provider Host Name Interface User Name Password Email Key hb a Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 70 Advanced gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your P 870HN 51D by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Interface Select the WAN interface to use for updating the IP address of the domain name User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Email Enter the user name you used to register for this service Key Enter the password you used to register for this service Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 870HN 51D Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 870HN 51D User s Guide 16 1 16
344. uae ead meno 235 23 9 Ihe General Diagnosi SGre uriinis aeiaai A aaea Riia 236 23 4 ThE 902 Ta GOGEN iioii ena E A EEE ar AA EA aG 237 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 24 TUE shoots neta asin ina mane aaao EEE AAE aa Sa 239 24 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS essesssssssssrsrsrsrrririririrurrerensnnnnnnsnrnrnrrrrrrrerene 239 24 2 P O 0ONN 51D Access and LOGU sscsascccncxieceasmanteicasamnuniedcachaviy snaamatee cemacanmiencnamuvinceaamennenen 240 PEE PRO SS ie A E E A OE E E A E EO N E N ES 242 24 4 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting dcscaicidaiassed sacaaiacaasceeiassescnctiastay eduddanasemoladatesmadiouanidaducnnasts 244 Chapter 25 age se oe ec foie ne aE a eee eee aae aes eee ome 247 2S hardware Ope MIAN OS sirrinin ni A EN abana 247 20 2 PUTTING SCAT COTIONIS eraci E 247 Appendix A Network Troubles hOOUNg secretes dcciectennscionctenedicedniuabscnoeectairanesteciseensiiedss 253 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address cecesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensaeeeeeeeaes 269 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 299 Appendix D IP Addresses and SUDNING oiriin a 309 Pe E Wiole LANS cs ce dese rse erie r nE anoe aata 321 Appena F Comino SSME E s 337 Appendix G Open Software AnnounCcementts c cccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeneeaes 341 Append A oot MIT fel age eee neem ene ee eminem a aa 355 e e
345. ued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to enable the filtering rule Address This is the URL of the web site in this rule Port This is the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Add Click Add to create a new rule Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 870HN 51D 18 3 1 Adding URL Filter Click the Add button in the URL Filter screen to open the following screen Figure 119 URL Filter Configuration Add URL Filter URL Address Port Number Default 80 will be applied ifleave blank Back Save Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 80 URL Filter Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION URL Address Enter the URL of web site to which the P 870HN 51D blocks or allows access Port Number Specify the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Save Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 870HN 51D P 870HN 51D User s Guide Interface Group 19 1 Overview By default all LAN and WAN interfaces on the P 870HN 51D are in the same group and can communicate with each other You can create multiple groups to have the P 870HN 5
346. uide 47 R RADIUS 327 message types 327 messages 327 shared secret key 328 registration product 358 related documentation 3 remote management TR 069 191 Remote Procedure Calls see RPCs 191 resetting your device 25 restore 230 RFC 1058 See RIP RFC 1389 See RIP RFC 1631 129 RFC 2131 See DHCP RFC 2132 See DHCP RFC 2516 249 RIP 92 167 Routing Information Protocol see RIP route 262 route status 60 router features 21 routing information 60 Routing Information Protocol See RIP RPPCs 191 RTS Request To Send 324 threshold 323 324 S safety warnings 7 service access control 194 Service Set 104 Services 139 SIP ALG 138 SIP Application Layer Gateway 138 SMTP 139 SNMP 139 250 SNMP trap 139 static route 159 163 167 static VLAN status indicators 24 storage humidity 247 storage temperature 247 subnet 309 subnet mask 96 310 subnetting 312 Symmetric NAT 86 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index Symmetric NAT Outgoing 87 syntax conventions 5 system name 56 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP IP 141 temperature 247 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 330 TPID 87 TR 064 193 TR 069 191 ACS setup 191 authentication 192 tracert 259 trademarks 355 transparent bridging 250 U unicast 88 Universal Plug and Play 197 application 198 UPnP 197 forum 198 security issues 198 V VID Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
347. ult setting Use the Next button to move on to the next screen You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen gt Encryption Type gt Pre Shared Key Back Figure 8 ZyXEL Utility Security Settings ikir 8 ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Next Exit P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Figure 9 ZyXEL Utility Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit 5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link I nfo screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network If the wireless client is not connected to a network the fields in this screen remain blank Figure 10 ZyXEL Utility Link Info Wireless Network Status Statistics gt Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt
348. ume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and ins
349. unneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to P 870HN 5
350. value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 14 8 1 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the P 870HN 51D the P 870HN 51D can automatically base on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence and or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class The following table shows you the internal layer 2 and layer 3 QoS mapping on the P 870HN 51D On the P 870HN 51D traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Table 69 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P QUEUE USER PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 0 1 0 000000 2 2 0 0 000000 gt 1100 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 14 Quality of Service QoS Table 69 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P QUEUE USER PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 3 3 1 001110 250 1100 001100 001010 001000 4 4 2 010110 010100 010010 010000 5 5 3 0111
351. verview 223 settings 224 Loop Back Response see LBR loopback 236 LTM 236 LTR 236 MA 235 MAC 56 MAC address 56 MAC address filter action 111 MAC filter 110 111 Maintenance Association see MA Maintenance Domain see MD Maintenance End Point see MEP managing the device good habits 22 MD 235 memory usage 57 MEP 235 Message Integrity Check MIC 330 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 87 multicast 88 92 97 N NAT 96 129 317 default server 137 DMZ host 137 external port 131 internal port 131 port forwarding 130 port number 130 139 services 139 Symmetric 86 NAT example 139 NAT traversal 197 netstat 265 Network Address Translation see NAT network troubleshooting 253 arp 261 ipconfig 255 netstat 265 ping 257 route 262 tracert 259 NNTP 139 O operation humidity 247 operation temperature 247 P Packet Transfer Mode 70 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Index Pairwise Master Key PMK 331 333 Per Hop Behavior see PHB 185 PHB 185 ping 257 timeout 258 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 139 POP3 139 141 142 ports 24 power adaptor 250 power specifications 247 PPP Point to Point Protocol Link Layer Protocol 250 PPPoE 85 Benefits 85 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 249 PPTP 139 preamble mode 325 product registration 358 PSK 331 PTM 70 Q QoS 169 184 marking 170 priority queue 185 setup 169 tagging 170 versus CoS 170 Quality of Service see QoS Quick Start G
352. will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 1 6 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts 1 7 The WPS Button You can use the WPS button on the rear panel of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security Refer to Section 7 9 4 on page 121 for more information on WPS 1 7 1 Turn the Wireless LAN Off or On 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the WPS button for one second and release it The WLAN WPS LED should change from on to off or vice versa 1 7 2 Activate WPS 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Select Active Wireless LAN and configure the SSID and security settings in the Network gt Wireless LAN screen Click Apply then 3 Make sure the WLAN LED is on P 870HN 51D User s Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introducing the P 870HN 51D 4 Press the WPS button for more than five seconds and release it Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the P 870HN 51D The WLAN WPS LED should flash while the P 870HN 51D sets up a WPS connec
353. xchange routing information with other routers 13 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The RIP screen lets you set up RIP settings on the P 870HN 51D Section 13 2 on page 167 13 2 The RIP Screen Click Advanced gt RIP to open the RIP screen Figure 86 Advanced gt RIP RIP NOTE RIP CANNOT BE CONFIGURED on the WAN interface which has NAT enabled such as PPPoE To activate RIP for the WAN Interface select the desired RIP version and operation and place a check in the Enabled checkbox To stop RIP on the WAN Interface uncheck the Enabled checkbox Click the Apply Save button to star stop RIP and save the configuration Version ipera 2 v Passive E Vv Passive Apply Save P 870HN 51D User s Guide 1 67 Chapter 13 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced gt RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the P 870HN 51D sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Operation Select Passive to have the P 870HN 51D update the routing table based on the R
354. y No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Activity Sent Be Received 2g a Packets 432 0 Disable Diagnose Close Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue 278 P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 157 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using This connection uses the following items o amp Client for Microsoft Networks M E QoS Packet Scheduler M Fie and aen ane for renege Networks Link Layer Topology Discovery annar 1 0 Driver M Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder instat Uninstall ss Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks P 870HN 51D User s Guide 279 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP 1Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 158 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties B Ih x General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwi
355. y WPA PSK LAN Logs WLAN Unconfigured 150M More Status WAN Service Statistics VDSL Statistics Route Info LAN Statistics WLAN Station List Client List Message P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Click the WLAN Station List hyperlink in the AP s Status screen You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP Figure 6 AP Status WLAN Station List WLAN Station List 00 03 7F BF 16 8C SSID_Example3 wid Refresh Interval EE sec setinterval_ s 2 2 3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network 2 2 3 1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility as in the following diagram The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point e Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured e Manually connect to a network e Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point AP which is configured for WPA PSK security and connected to the Internet Before you connect to the a
356. y R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the P 870HN 51D routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials This tutorial uses the following example IP settings Table 2 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The P 870HN 51D s WAN 172 16 1 1 The P 870HN 51D s LAN 192 168 1 1 A 192 168 1 34 R s N1 192 168 1 253 R s N2 192 168 10 2 B 192 168 10 33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 1 Log into the P 870HN 51D s Web Configurator in advanced mode 2 Click Advanced gt Static Route 3 Click Add to add a new rule in the Static Route screen IP Static Route Static Route Rules a Active Destination Netinask catenay Interface Nodify 4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings 4a Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 for the destination N2 4b Select the WAN interface to which the rule applies This example uses the default WAN interface 4c Select Gateway Address and type 192 168 1 253 R s N1 address in the Gateway IP Address field Static Route Setup Destination IP Address 192 168 10 0 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Use Interface ipoe_0_0_1_1ptm0_1 M Use Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 Back Apply Cancel 4a Click Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide
357. y destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of compete
358. y in addition to the IP address and domain name where available of the server on that leg of the journey Syntax tracert target The target can be an IP address or a host name Parameters tracert d h maximumhops target There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt tracert www example com Tracing route to www example com 192 0 32 10 over a maximum of 30 hops 1 lt 1 ms lt 1 ms lt 1 ms 172 23 x x 2 5 ms 4 ms 5 ms 172 23 x x 3 4 ms 4 ms 4ms 172 23 x x 4 5 ms 4 ms 6 ms 219 87 158 97 static tfn tw 219 87 158 97 5 6 ms 5 ms 4 ms 10 42 232 150 6 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms he cl2r2 router tw 220 128 7 86 7 10 ms 7 ms 10 ms tp s2 c12r12 router tw 220 128 2 90 8 9 ms 7 ms 8 ms pr03 s2 tp tw 220 128 4 181 9 6 ms 6 ms 9 ms 220 128 3 249 NET IP tw 220 128 3 249 10 138 ms 137 ms 138 ms r1l pa NET IP net 211 72 108 129 11 138 ms 138 ms 138 ms po4 0 core01 sjc04 atlas com 154 54 11 129 12 128 ms 139 ms 140 ms te9 2 mpd01 sjc04 atlas com 154 54 0 173 13 140 ms 139 ms 136 ms 61 58 33 173 14 154 ms 153 ms 137 ms xe 0 0 0 r20 gin ntt net 129 250 16 161 15 154 ms 154 ms 137 ms as 2 r21 tokyjp01 jp ntt net 129 250 4 81 16 562 ms 553 ms 553 ms 38 106 6 34 17 554 ms 554 ms 553 ms po 2 r00 lsancal9 us ntt net 129 250 6 42 18 254 ms 254 ms 248 m
359. you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP To access this screen click Network gt NAT The following screen appears Figure 62 NAT Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Service Name WAN Interface Server IP Address External port Internal port Protocol v jipoe_0_0_1_1 4ptm0_1 x fus2 168 1 Start 80 End 80 Start 80 End 80 TCP 7 Add a ae e Interface Start Port End Port Start Port End Port Address Web 1 Vv HTTP ptmO_1 80 80 192 168 1 33 g mi Ta Loreal P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 NAT Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Select a pre defined service from the drop down list box The pre defined service port number s and protocol will display in the External port Internal port and Protocol fields Otherwise select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where you can manually enter the port number s and select the IP protocol WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server
360. your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Figure 173 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication A Authenticate x System policy prevents mi modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action Q CJ chris gt Details In the Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Figure 174 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections Fa Network setings Location E E Connections General DNS Hosts Point to point connec This network interface is not c P 870HN 51D User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens Figure 175 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Properties m eO Propernes Ea Connection Settings Configuration lt IP address Subnet mask Gateway address cancel e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network S
361. your rules after you configure them These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator Your customized rules take precedence and override the P 870HN 51D s default rules 9 3 The Firewall Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Incoming to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured incoming filtering rules Figure 70 Firewall gt Incoming Incoming Firewall ACL rules Setup When the Firewall ACL rule is enabled on a WAN interface all incoming IP traffic is BLOCKED However some IP traffic can be ACCEPTED by setting up filters Choose Add or Remove to configure incoming Firewall ACL rules Note Firewall rules only be applied when firewall WAN interface is enabled M active Firewall CR ES ST Vv example ptmO_1 TCP or UDP 192 168 1 33 255 255 255 0 Add Apply P 870HN 51D User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Firewall gt Incoming LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Firewall Select this check box to enable the firewall on the P 870HN 51D When the firewall is enabled the P 870HN 51D blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN Create custome rules below to allow certain WAN users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN to a certain computer on the LAN Act
362. ystem and Maintenance User Accounts ia iia Get started with Windows Change account type Back up your computer Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Security Check for updates ay Allow a program through Windows ms Firewall a Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution etwork and Internet Connect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks lk Change keyboards or other input Set up file sharing methods Change display language P 870HN 51D User s Guide 273 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon Figure 148 Windows Vista Network And Internet 3 CION gt gt Control Panel Network and Internet p p Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home i EN Network and Sharing Center n am nnect to a network System and Maintenance Security e Network and Internet View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Internet Options Connect to the Internet Change yourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies jz Hardware and Sound 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 149 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center Gv 5 Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v File Edit View Tools Help Tasks A A Network and Sharing Center View computers a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Ubuntu Server Guide  『MDX-D7100』の取扱説明書がダウンロードできます。  Samsung RZ80EERS Kullanıcı Klavuzu  Manual - MedWrench  whynter 70 pint residential portable dehumidifier with built  Bristar mode d`emploi  Fisher-Price 78478 Motorized Toy Car User Manual  MANUEL D UTILISATION DU SCORPIO  簡単接続ガイド(約5MB) - 嶺南ケーブルネットワーク  JAW 1.041 Hardware User Manual Updated: Aug 30 2008  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file